HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 6418 - Contract- Lubbock Building Services Inc.- Reese Center Police Academy Renovation - 06_24_1999Resolution No.6418
June 24, 1999
Item No. 40
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract to install and
furnish all materials and services as bid for the City of Lubbock Reese Center Police
Academy Renovation, between the City of Lubbock and Lubbock Building Services,
Inc., and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this
resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City
Council.
Passed by the City Council this 24th day of _ June , 1999.
WINDY SITTgN, MAYOR
A EST:
Kay arnell
City S retary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
V ul
Victor KilmanPurchasing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
William de Haas
Competition and Contracts Manager/Attorney
rkb/ccdocs/Lubbock Building Services.res
June14,1999
8't-j -,U--
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION
BID #99106
c
CITY OF LT -TB --BOCK
Lubbock, Texas
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock. Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164
ITB #99106, Addendum #3
Office of
Purchasing
ADDENDUM #3
ITB #99106
CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER
POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION
MAILED TO VENDOR:
OLD CLOSE DATE:
NEW CLOSE DATE:
May 24,1999
May 25,1999 @ 2:00 P.M.
June 10,1999 @ 2:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. The closing date has been changed from May 25, 1999 at 2:00 P.M. to the new closing date of
June 10.1999 at 2:00 P.M.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
r• Questions may be faxed to : (806) 775-2164
or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
r TH K YO
1,
I^ Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
r. PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
i
C
ITB 99106ad3.doc
r
r
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock. Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164
ITB #99106, Addendum #2
Office of
Purchasing
ADDENDUM #2
ITB #99106
CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER
POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION
MAILED TO VENDOR:
CLOSE DATE:
May 19, 1999
May 25,1999 @ 2:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. The close date of June 10, 1999 on Addendum #1 mailed on May 18, 1999 for the above
mentioned bid is incorrect. The Close Date is May 25, 1999 Cagy 2:00 PM as stated in the
Bid Specifications on page 1, paragraph 1 of the Notice to Bidders.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Questions may be faxed to:
or Email to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
(806) 775-2164
RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
ZTHKYOU
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
ITB 99106ad2.doc
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock. Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 9 Fax (806) 775-2164
ITB #99106, Addendum #1
Office of
Purchasing
ADDENDUM 0
ITB #99106
CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER
POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION
MAILED TO VENDOR: May 18,1999
CLOSE DATE: June 10, 1999 @ 2:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find attached Addendum One from Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
2. Please find the revised Bid Submittal form.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Questions may be faxed to
or Email to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
(806) 775-2164
RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
ITB 99106ad1.doc
® l�
® Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
Rid
Member
AmerionInstitute ofAn'hiteRs j Project City of Lubbock Police Academy Renovations
American Institute of j Reese Center, Lubbock, Texas
certified m-- Bid Date: May 25,1999, 2:00 p.m.
AmeriOn Society of
aAneers ADDENDUM ONE
Architects
Planners
Engineers
I
612 Broadway j
Lubbock, Texas
79401
806.749. 1153
fax 749. 1866
1 info@greenharvey.com
1 www.greenharvey.com
r
j
18,1999
1. Sheet E2: Electrical Floor Plan
Existing light fixtures not working are to be reworked as needed. Rework is to include replacement of ballast, re-
lamping, replacement of broken lenses, etc. as necessary.
2. Sheet A2
Rework exterior double doors #17 to Equipment Room #116 & #63 to Mechanical Room #159 so they work smoothly.
Rework is to include replacement of door hardware as needed.
3. Sheet A3
All areas shown to receive new ceilings are to have existing ceilings removed. Selected repair of existing ceiling
finishes is to match existing finish to maximum extent possible.
4. Sheet A4 & Specifications 10440; Slgns 12.3, 2.5, & 3.21
Coordinate new exterior building signage with the new Reese Center standards. Submit signage to architect for review
before ordering any exterior signage.
5. Sheet A4131A4)
New built-in seatingltableldisplay assembly is to be new millwork as specified in Section 06400.
Seating upholstery shall be heavy duty, equal to HON price code IV, flammability Class I. Color and texture to be
selected by architect.
The two new display cabinets are to have finished wood base and trim over the existing cmu base down to the floor.
The existing emu base exposed between the display cabinets is to be cleaned and painted per finish schedule.
The track for the sliding glass doors on the display cases is to be equal to Knape & Vogt P1092 ANOD with 963 CHR
ratchet lacks. Use 114" tempered clear glass for sliding doors and shelves in the display cases, sand edges.
6. Sheet M1 Inote 7) & Sheet A5 WAS)
Existing floor drain in room #169 is to be capped below floor surface and abandoned as stated an M1. Level floor over
abandoned floor drain. Prepare floor for new VCT finish.
7. Sheet E2:
Change the location of the new security panel from the east wall of the Exercise Room #165 to the east wall of the
Mechanical Room d159.
8. General:
Successful contractor will be given keys to the facility for full access to the building. Reese Center is currently open
24 hours every day. Confirm hours when beginning project.
END OF ADDENDUM
r
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
PLACE:
r" DATE:
PROJECT NUMBER: #99106 - CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION
r
Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder)
r. To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
r
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a
t
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract
documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of.
the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and
supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time
set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required
under the contract documents.
F
BASE BID: City of Lubbock Reese Center Police Academy Renovation.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL BASE BID: ($ )
ALTERNATE #1: Gymnastics wall and floor exercise mats in Room 165. Alternate is to include all mounting hardware
and accessories required for a complete installation.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #1: (ADD) ($ )
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
r.. Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
i "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 (ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTY)
consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby
further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each
consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set
forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
r
rBidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
l instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
r Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
�-, The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on
which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
r Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
i certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable
without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the
i" bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all
necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
t., Enclosed with this bid Is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
i Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond In the sum of Dollars
($ 1, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages In the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned falls to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt
of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Authorized Signature
(Printed or Typed Name)
Company
Address
City, County
State Zip Code
Telephone: -
Fax:
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
Secretary
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda No. Date
Addenda No. Date
Addenda No. Date
Addenda No. Date
r 2
PW
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INVITATION TO BID
FOR
TITLE: CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 99106
PROJECT NUMBER: 9630.9211.30000
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
r
r+ 1.
2.
.. 3.
1
a
4.
r-;
5.
i
6.
r
7.
r. 8.
9.
10.
INDEX
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
PAYMENT BOND
PERFORMANCE BOND
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACT
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
No Text
0
` NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID #99106
Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the
office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00
o'clock p.m. on the 25th day of May,1999, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to
furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
"CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION"
r�
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the
Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud.
r■ It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for
the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 10th day of June. 1999, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th
r Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids
and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with
Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price
exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.
Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified
r-• check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a
guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of
award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local
l conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been
thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on
day of May, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room-11-04, Lubbock, Texas
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is
,.., specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a,
Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the
contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to
this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in
consideration for an award.
.. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and
bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more
accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775-
2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
v�
P
VICTOR KIL AN
PURCHASING MANAGER
Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street,
Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806) 775-2167/Fax (806) 775-2164.
r..
No Text
7
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
6
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to
complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER
POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General
Conditions.
All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the
construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by
said contract documents.
3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by
j the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without
charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice
to Bidders.
r
4. BIDDER INQUIRIES
No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification
concerning this bid must be addressed to:
RON SHUFFIELD
SENIOR BUYER
CITY OF LUBBOCK
P.O. BOX 2000
LUBBOCK, TX 79457
FAX (806) 775-2164
5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 120 (ONE HUNDRED AND
TWENTY) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of
4
Lubbock to the successful bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the
City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the
contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by
the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may
P" direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the
t time specified.
6. PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the
contract documents.
7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements
contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the
Contractor has been notified.
8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will
be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until
incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods
set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to
procure a satisfactory project.
9. GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective
materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general
guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all
damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from
date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner _.
(City of Lubbock).
Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants
fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited
to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services
provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this
Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants the year 2000 calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will
not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may
require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all
the obligations contained herein.
The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or
any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of
Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City
of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its
right pertaining to termination or default.
The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract,
and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability
which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated
In this Contract by reference. r.
10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications; and related contract documents for his use
during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or
others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
r-
` 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any
and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the
r date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have
I been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by
the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
{ (c) Equipment schedule.
12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
r
i. This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article
20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. ,
I The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials
to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a
r way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or
I other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the
project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the
location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve
pr' the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by
l Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by
Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
f,
14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and
shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be
necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs,
and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and
I" replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of
barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
15. EXPLOSIVES
The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from
the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume
full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all
cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life
or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or
corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
r In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it
t shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in
proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given
3
sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their
property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage
resulting from his blasting operations.
16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the
work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and
telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by
this contract is in progress.
17. INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All
policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor
shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, Insurance protection as
hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall
be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all "—
operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate
policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each
and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. _
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative,
shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular
project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof
of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor.
18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in
the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further
directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the
wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of
general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from
compliance with any wage law that may be applicable.Construction work under this contract requiring an
inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort
to complete the contract within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must
notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires
to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on
whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's
Representative.
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this
contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work,
regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer
dangerous to property or life.
19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount,
not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the
�., work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or
Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his
classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the
copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made,
or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees
J according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which
schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on
whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each
P calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his
particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents.
.r
20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
l decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the
bidder without being considered.
21. PREPARATION FOR BID
The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled
in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work
i contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or
typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price
written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly
authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each
r member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly
authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business
address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing
agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid
shall be executed in ink.
Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed
on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Bid for (description of the project).
Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no
bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(e)
b
M
(g)
Notice to Bidders.
General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder's Submittal.
Statutory Bond (if required).
Contract Agreement.
General Conditions.
Special Conditions (if any).
rM
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
G) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein
in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy
the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable
investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the -"
bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of
Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to
satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to cant' out the obligations of the contract and to _
complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include:
1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required.
2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified,
without delay or interference.
3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder.
4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
6
No Text
C
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
PLACE: 1625 13th Street
DATE: June 10 , 199.9
PROJECT NUMBER: #99106 - CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION
Bid of Tmhhnck Building Services, Inc (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation forbids for the construction of a Reese Center Police
Academy Renovations .0
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract
documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of
the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and
supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time
set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required
under the contract documents.
BASE BID: City of Lubbock Reese Center Police Academy Renovation.
MATERIALS:A#/r..% c + dOvf..-� cue _ .- c�_T�r 9 �4fisCl 3,39
SERVICES: ilia �z, ��O /2r11 ($ /oz
TOTAL BASE BI
ALTERNATE #1: Gymnastics wall and floor exercise mats In Room 165. Alternate is to include all mounting hardware
and accessories required for a complete installation. /
MATERIALS: ��,.: t /�i �� : `�t4 T,i,« v� c� �...�-►�r >Cr�e ($, S '7 S. o o )
SERVICES:O tiC !fir o.. j . cJ a-r.� t `+— a�eGl
TOTAL ALTERNATE #1: (ADD) G� vc.✓ / 7 d '�'��— ($ I 400
)
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 120 (ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTY)
t consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby
further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each
r, consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set
forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
6 ,
f
t
r
F
I
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on
which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable
without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the
bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all
necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ 1 or a Bid Bond in the sum of Five Percent Dollars
($ 5% ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner anarthe undersigned falls to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt
of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be execut y Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance wAh tt a Notice to Bidders. `
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATT ST, 4
S 66ve tary
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the fol oyving addenda:
Addenda No. _� Date y -/ �7
Addenda No. Date S 147 r y
Addenda No. Date y aY : S
Addenda No. Date
-(Printed or Typed Name)
Lubbock Building
Services, Inc.
Company
14302 S. Slide
Suite B
Address
Lubbock
Lubbock
City,
TPxas
County
79424
State
Zip Code
Telephone: 806 _ 798-7005
Fax: 806— n8-8256
F
2
��>>
• <(�0 4ANDLMNITY COHP0I3Arl'ION
(a Stock Company, organized under the laws of Wisconsin)
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That we, . Lubbock Building Services. Inc.
(hereinafter called
the "Principal"), as Principal, and the Capitol Indemnity Corporation of Madison, Wisconsin a corporation duly
organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (hereinafter called the "Surety"), as Surety,
are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock
(hereinafter called the 'Obligee"), In
the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF AMOUNT BID BY PRINCIPAL------- Dollars 05x of Bid ),
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for
City of Lubbock Reese Center j
Police Academy Renovation I
VOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligea shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a
:ontract with the Obligee In accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may
)e specified in the bidding or Contract documents with good and sufficient surety far the faithful
ierformance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution
hereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds,
f the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount
:peclfied in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another
)arty to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to
amain in full force and effect.
signed and sealed this loth day of , June A.D. 19 gy
1
(SEAL)
rtness r^-- {SEAL)
(principal)
(Title)
i
CAP:'^.t.COAFORATIOty
A YYis 9 in Corporation, (Surety) ,
(SEAL)
MUG)
ic�.azz-eo-terea� .,
No Text
r Bond #, 746443
l STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253
r OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(PUBLIC WORKS)
r (Penalty of this Bond must be,.100% of Contract Amountl
KNOW ALL -MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Lubbock Building.Services, Inc.
(hereinafter called the Principal),, -as Principal,' and Capitol Indennity Corporation
(hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held -,and firmly bound unto
City of Lubbock
r(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of
ONE HUNDRED EIGHTY SIX THOUSAND SEVEN HUNDRED THIRTY DOLLARS AND N0/100--=--
DOLLAR ($ ,186,730.00 )
for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs,
administrators, executors, successors and assigns,,jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
` WHEREAS-, the Principal -has-entered into a certain written contract With the Obligee,
r =dated the_. 24th day of June - 1999 to
i City of Lubbock Reese- Center-,Poli-ce- Academy_ Renovation ---
which contract is hereby referred .to and made .a 'part ,hereof as fully and to .the same
- extent as if copied at length 'herein.-
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal
r+ shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the
prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, ,then this obligation shall be void
otherwise to remain in full force and.effect.
l PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provi-sions of
` Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the. provisions, conditions and limitations of said
!� Chapter to the same extent as if -it were copied- at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said_Principal and. Surety have signed this instruaent this
r- 28th day of •June 1999
• (Principal)
By4,11 I�
(Surety)
By
Staci Gross, Attorney -in -Fact
w.e _
VONWINDEMNITY CORPORATION
E
4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705 0900
PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADISON, WI 53705-0900
PHONE (608) 231-4450 • FAX (608) 231-2029
POWER OF ATTORNEY No: 515154
III meny these Presents, That the CAPITOL.IIUDEMNITt`CORPORA'ff3K, aorporation
of ttieate cif. Wxsctnsrrt havrng'its principal off)ces )r� 3he City bf IVladlsnd1Vlsconaln, dries make, canatltute and appoint.
r,:, ;� „. :. ter,. <. ..}'..
- STACI J. 'GROSS, LAURA A. 1;51'INOZA, SIEVE DEAL_ OR DONAti BOLEY - - .
f # x :.
,� trim and lawful A,ttorreYe� faCt,.to ke,xecutw 5ea1, and del��dr fqf artd Ills I��hlf;as :suety; and as act
anddeed, any aril alt bnd, cdertakrna anc# corira�ts Af :suretyship,` praVlded fat rid Mond rtC r indertaltmg or contract
of atiretyship executed ubde tb�suthorlty skiailxGeed in an punt the sum of
° --- - Tf;T "!'O ECCEED..�4,000,000.iIb
This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by`the auth<y of the following
JIesolution, adopted y theh oard of Directory Qf CAPITOL IND MNITY� ORPO iATION at a meeUl��g dulcalled and . -
r: fiipiri enP kith ciao af; hltav 4 990:
Fee
ff
1
dl
fob
;.
i
I
fdll
PERFORMANCE BOND
4
Fob
1
i
'I
swiD CHECK
BEST RATING
_
L3fli XAS
BY
F
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE. BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253 Bond # 746443
-- - _.__ -- -- - -- -OF THE Tb S�GOYEP-N}iENT COOS
(PUBLIC WORKS)
C(Penalty of this Bond =ust be 1007, of contract Amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
(hereinafter called the Prindi.pa,l) , as principal, and Capitol Indemnity Corporation
N
1
(hereinafter.called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
City of Lubbock = ;
(hereinafter called the obligee), in the amount of
ONE HUNDRED EIGHTY SIX THOUSAND SEVEN H-UNpRED THIRTY DOLLARS AN9•N0j100----L
DOLLAR (S- 186,730.00
for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves-. and their heirs,
administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written co:tract with the oblig
dated the 24th daY•of • June , 1999 tc
City_of Lubbock Reese Center Police -Academy Renovation _
which contract -is hereby. referred to and made a part hereof as.fully and to the se_e
extent as if copied Ett-length herein.. -
U01rd, THEREFORE, TX- CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS.SUCH, that if the said P r i
shall faithfully perfo.m- the wore:.ia accordance with the plans,- specifications a:.'
contract documents, then. this obligatio:: shall be void, otherwise to regain in. fuck
an' effecc.
• PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions o-
ChaDte: 2253 of the Texas Covern=eat Code and all liabilities dz thit'_ 6td shall
deter`:ned in accordance with tre provisions, conditions and li-_:.+cations of saie
Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herei.c'
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instr—ent
28th day oA.
f June 1999
(Princ
B9 `
(Surer
Bg
Staci Gross Attorac3-i
No Text
........ .....«,.,. .,._u_....
..: n i r 4 Yi k ! i ,
y g,f �, . DATE
gd�piu DATE (MIWDDIYY)
h,,■■■?4,., ,i.■■■■;..L�
' ;'.fx'rtu�� h ${C
Y
,,./CORD r,'M+1�5i,
��}�hu?..w
Tr a �rti �. xr tr,4..r�.4...w4d+2/�r.:.{R,T.i�Y-..Y'#"•t�
Y..rAf.'W' , ,
4« 1 tuw:�:�d►i5f.vA.�.SI+1h
NFI.r
6 06/30/1999
-;Sk3 6'
)DUCER (806) 798-7979 FAX (806) 798-7888
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
utler-Carson Insurance Agency
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
U05 82nd St, Suite 10
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
( bbock, TX 79424
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVE_R_AGE
COMPANY Maryland Casulaty Company
Attn: Ext:
A
7URED _ ..
Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
.........
COMPANY Maryland Insurance Company ..............
B
I P.O. Box 65600-194.___._.__.
-- -
Lubbock, TX 79464
COMPANY ierra Insurance Co. of Texas�-
C
COMPANY
D
� .'� ., � � eM "'x � � '� ` �.� � �a�, �rx ^ � � � ,„ . �, � � �,��� '' ; � : � .r � r� _z� .`�' ��'. .. `� ��,, �'.'�`` ` '". , ` �>. �' ?� . '' h7
rYERAGES
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW
HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS.
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY
HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
--_—._. ._...____........... ....... ...... ............. _.. __.. __.. _.___......_.................... ._... .......-_.__.__.....
,._.._..-___...._........._._.......r_.., .... .._.....__.. -..
TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION !
LIMITS
DATE (MMIDDIYY) DATE (MMIDO/YY)
GENERAL LIABILITY
GENERAL AGGREGATE 13 11000,000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
........,.... ..... ....... ...
PRODUCTS COMPlOPAGG S 1,000,000
CLAIMSMADE X OCCUR
EPA32131667
_ —
09/03/1998 O9/03/1999 PERSONAL&ADVINJURY S 1,000,000
OWNERS &CONTRACTORSPROTI
EACH OCCURRENCE S 11000,000
............... .. ... ....... s
_ ----------------_-�_..-_---
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) S 500,000
' MED EXP (Any one Person) S 51000
AUTOMOBILE LIABILTY
ANY AUTO
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT S
500,000
6 ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
S
SCHEDULED AUTOS
D WAA22761986
(Per person)
09/03/1998 `. 09/03/1999 ........................................ -.....__._........ __
X HIRED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
S
X NON -OWNED AUTOS
(Per acadont)
_ ........
PROPERTY DAMAGE S
GARAGE LIABILITY
ANY ALTO
AUTO ONLY EA ACCIDENT $
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY
EACH ACCIDENT' S
AGGREGATES
EXCESS LIABILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE S _.. _... ........
UMBRELLA FORM
AGGREGATE S
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
S
r WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
EMPLOYERS LIABILITY
- J 1056068C
"
09/29/1998 09/29/1999 EL EACH ACCIDENT s 500,000
THE PROPRIETOR/ j INCL
EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT v S 500,000
PARTNERSIEXECUTIVE ;.......
................ ................. _..
OFFICERS ARE: EXCL
EL DISEASE • EA EMPLOYEE : $ 500,0
OTHER
:SCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONS/VEHICLESISPECIAL ITEMS
uditional Insured & Waiver of Subrogation on General
Liability & Waiver of Subrogation on
orkers' Compensation in favor of the certificate
holder as pertains to their interest in the
ese Center Police Academy Renovation.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER a , 3 Y= r :.
.. : h. .. �..,. ...„,,,. »..-. ,.'."G' '.wir9w;t...w.4,...usa
>'CANCEC�:ATIO , EI Ils'"° 1 srl i
sws..ra+ir:+.uur+r .aWuWw"'3tito-;r...:ie.z,'
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
City of Lubbock —
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH N TICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
P . O. BOX 2000
OF ANY KIND UPON TH OMPrry4GEy EPREsENTATtm.
AUTHORIZED REPRESE ATIVE
Lubbock, TX 79408
John Carson 92AA04 _._
�771277,7 '" }? d��. ��� � ;,,��;
n.
9.a I ,'�,� ��.��:��,��u,�,r,��I,��,�9�
_-._max,.. .. ,�,v.R,. �9.1 : �szk.:r;, e. n, Y.uAfi
,.. '�,
��.�x�, ,,�.=sF.�<�,� �,a�,�.>k�.. +':� ,.,J,..:,�C,OR'�OR�TIONI't98
• ..... -. ..........:...w.q..tw:.. w= � �Y1' 3
a caRo C ER l F ' E7
lzxab 4r3C 3�Mty e2':W,c� �'N3 s. V.S,YrK y'a #. `.F�.Jx �: Z � h yt
�+ I, B l: `F SU Eli YE S DATE (MM/DDIYY)
TM :U
ss 06 30 1999
/ /
.,
iODUCER (806) 798-7979 FAX (806) 798-7888 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
utl er-Carson Insurance Agency
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
05 82nd St, Suite 10
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
ubbock, TX 79424
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
... .... . ......... ...._._
COMPANY Maryland Casualty Company
Aftn:
Ext: A
ISURED
City of Lubbock
COMPANY
B
P.O. Box 65600-194
Lubbock, TX 79464
COMPANY
C
COMPANY
D
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THATTHEPOLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
+ INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM
OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
O TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
TR
DATE (MMIDD/YY) DATE (MWDD/YY)
GENERAL LIABILITY
GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 11000,000
. _...._.
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AG_G ' S
y_.-.__, CLAIMS MADE ' X ; OCCUR
_ S
PERSONAL 3 ADV INJURY
A -- CON98703516
07/01/1999 07/01/2000 _. ... __...__.._
X OWNER'S 3 CONTRACTOR'S PROT
EACH OCCURRENCE i $ 1,000,000
__..
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) : $
—
MED EXP (Any one person) $
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
COMBINED SINGLE LIMB S
ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
t
SCHEDULED AUTOS
(Per Person
HIRED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY t
NON -OWNED AUTOS
(Per accident)
......... .. _.........
PROPERTY DAMAGE S
GARAGE LIABILITY
AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY a ;`
EACH ACCIDENT; $
AGGREGATE.$
EXCESS LIABILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE $
UMBRELLA FORM
AGGREGATE S
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
t
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
TORY LIMITS ' ER n'
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
EL EACH ACCIDENT S
THE PROPRIETOR/
PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE INCL
-�— - _-
EL DISEASE -POLICY LIMB $
OFFICERS ARE. EXCL
EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $
OTHER
W DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS!LOCATIONSIVEHICLESISPECIAL ITEMS
�ob: Reese Police Academy
;,CERTIFICATE HOLDER v ` t t}= _
CANCELLATION '� x
...� � ..�..�
.Y.�.�.;
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
I
10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LABILITY
P . 0. BOX 6 5600-194
OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
HORDED REPRESENTA
Lubbock, TX 79464
1ACOR6255�(1195}Y�.
. ..:r... r„ , ...
z
3<',_.h,ACRD_¢RPQkA�Ft01,198'
7
t
r
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on
proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the
contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of
any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide
coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words
or changes:
r
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The taw requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal
requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to
report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing
of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this
rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days
after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services.
3
No Text
r
_ CONTRACT
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 24t' day of June.1999 by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Lubbock Building Services, Inc. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock
and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
r WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
f performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
i
r
BID #99106 - CITY OF LUBBOCK REESE CENTER POLICE ACADEMY RENOVATION - $186,730.00
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance
and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract
documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with
the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make
payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
City Attorney
ATTEST:'
r
Cor orate Secretary
r
C
CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER)
By:
MAYO
CONTRACTOR:
LUB CK BUILDIN RVICES, INC.
By:
PRINTED NAME: �,�✓'-► �1
TITLE:
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
14302 S. Slide, Suite B
Lubbock, Texas 79424
r"
No Text
r
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City
of Lubbock, Texas.
7 2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co-
partnership or corporation, to wit LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES. INC. who has agreed to perform the work
7 embraced in this contract, or their legal representative.
I
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
I referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will
inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may
r" be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors
will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor
or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
r"
r 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
4
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder
for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to
,., herein as the "contract" or "contract documents".
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or
words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation
or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable,"
"Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or. satisfactory to the Owner's
Representative.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look,exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor.
" 7. WRITTEN NOTICE
I
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of
the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last
business address known to the party who gives the notice.
I
8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or
work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such
recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents
has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still
may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all —
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and
Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the
Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the
Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems
said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract
documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary,
Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but
such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore.
The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades
will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless
destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be
replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense.
2
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority
to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The
Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work
and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the
execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be
conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15)
calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection
by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may
deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said
material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall
furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the
proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and
instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and
instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications
provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or
inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's
Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any
and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory
to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions
given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate
supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance
of the work and lack of such supervisiori shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and
r.. location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the
contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or
r" Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms
or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all
modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's
,., Representative and Contractor.
rF-
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of.the work
to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance In the type of
work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall
inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion,
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or
men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of
any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such
structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be
approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at
any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any
observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to
the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject
any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of
its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative
has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without
approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for
examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at
a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or
require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to
furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons
competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated.
All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials
or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or .Owner's Representative,
be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective,
and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
4 --
E
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such
r inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance
' with the requirements of the contract documents.
i
r 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not
in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written
notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy
such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial
action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
E 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either
before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
if such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a
claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of
work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual
expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
r- 24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work asshown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered
by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced,
then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the
extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged
by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for
performance of the extra work.
r-. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for
the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred,
" together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age
' Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other
insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by
r 5
them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be
kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership
Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for
the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent
(15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit,
overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not
embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office
must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall
be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra
work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should
a difference of opinion arise,as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and
the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making
written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as -,
provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement
any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a
clarification obtained before the bids are received, and If no such notice is received by the Owner's
Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands
the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance
with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and
specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any
request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of _
bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of
work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the
Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
0
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment
and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages,
expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or
contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection
with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or,any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any
manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject
matter of this contract.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an
independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given
by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses,
are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to
supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors.
+ 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change.
All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and
its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance,
rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of
payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in
conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver..
The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor,
or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance
specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative,
r•• shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular
i project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof
of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor.
A. General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00
Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
N
i
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury
Advertising Injury
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance.
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1,000,000.00 Combined Single
Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, r-
to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and
Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job
and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance/installation Floater Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0.00% of the total contract trice (100%
of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
E. ' Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of LQ.00 on all contracts with
coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability
coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00.
1. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority
to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-
83, or 7WCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's
or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project- includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor
Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with
the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -
operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to
8 ^
r
e
i
provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a
r'- project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of
Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on
the project, for the duration of the project.
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter.
7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by
the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the
project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and
report lack of coverage.
9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
}
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
i'
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
i
of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
l."
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:
1*" 9
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will
provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance
carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance
Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative
penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity. ._
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence
of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the
insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate. .-
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at
the address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
10
F
r
i
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
e project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of
any coverage agreements;
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental
entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for
all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type
and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and
any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be
the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
'The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services
related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation
Insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or
materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the
project, regardless of the Identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive
Information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your
employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to
provide coverage;" and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language:
"By signing this contract or providing or causing to be
provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this
contract is representing to the governmental entity that all
employees of the person signing this contract who will
provide services on the project will be covered by workers'
compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that
the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of
classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
Insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the
commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the
Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties,
civil penalties, or other civil actions.";
(iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown _
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
project;
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
12
r
t
E
I�
l (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
r materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
r required by paragraphs (I)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to
I the person for whom they are providing services.
r•- 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of
1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
r- 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS
I OF MACHINERY. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless
} against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way,
manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of
machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract
and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or
rwaived.
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of
those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five
(5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain
unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a
sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such
indebtedness.
r
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
.. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material
j or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof.
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except
that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or
required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material
or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers,
agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's
Representative prior to bidding.
F^
r
r" 13
i
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form,
the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such
laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor
observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in
writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the
work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within
said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or
local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors
perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's
Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as _
the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may
enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as
though embodied herein.
33. SUBCONTRACTING
The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this _
contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required
in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as
provided by the contract documents.
34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of —
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in
this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified,
then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner
may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) _
PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each
and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing
the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial
completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages
the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount
agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and
is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. —
IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS
OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT.
14
r
35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall
be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as
shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution
shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this
contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that
when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may
g" direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the
l construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall.submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the
Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
F36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE
The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and
has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that
it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been
delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors
employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public
f enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all
justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days
,.. of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the
extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial,
and final Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided
herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived.
i-�
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such
work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in
securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except
where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in
which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such
stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
r' No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
`.. specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated
to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they
are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing
their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are
expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ
somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method,
payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
15
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way _
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be
liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without
limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the —
Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees,
against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising
from or growing out of the performance of this contract.
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by
the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to
receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all
expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner
and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of
Owner's Representative.
41. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's
agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for
partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine
the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if _
submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a
certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor
up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's
Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the
Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of the contract documents.
Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to --
enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work
performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said
partial payment is attributable.
16
F
43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31)
working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time,
if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's
Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding
the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete
the work within the time provided in this contract.
44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final
completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final
completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's
Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion,
Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final
completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the
obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or
warranties implied by law or otherwise.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
r.. on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and
Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
i^ such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the
l contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and
l Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which
shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's
r" Representative.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify
the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the
amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
17
47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's
Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner —
shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right
under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by
Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's
Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed
denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed
that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor,
and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and
Owner's Representative, by Contractor.
48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after
written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the
written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety
on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be
delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no
further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. —
After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and
equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or
credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for
under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice
hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with
diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract
documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or
otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective _
manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, —
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall
be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time
become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than
the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the
Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the
sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said
Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or —
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper
having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of
the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of
any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost
under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain
bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which —
would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be
credited therewith.
18
r
In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work as described above when the work p p o . shall
have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as
provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract
accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
Contractor and his Surety, If applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be,
r-R shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would
have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract,
or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the
Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over
to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price,
and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time
designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of
the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided,
ttr however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of
E such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to
the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the
t.. date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net
sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at
} either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than
r the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners.
j The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted
r.. by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this
k paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise
f of remedies "hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies
available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in
r" paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth.
49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY
The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually
t performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be
liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the
project which is the subject matter of this contract.
50. BONDS
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved
Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be
in effect until such bonds are so furnished.
19
i
51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions
conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall
control.
52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the --
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to
direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and
vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or
effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's
Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
54. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition.
In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS
Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same
may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in
any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the
Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the —
City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a
Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in
the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project
or other property of the City,,a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts
and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least
twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and
provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If
the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5)
days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied.
In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (1) trained for the level of expertise required for proper
performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage,
disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or _
asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective
gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum
products or byproducts and/or asbestos.
20
No Text
Item No. 39
RESOLUTION April 8, 1999
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing
rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute .
�•- public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of
P ! Vernon's Ann. Civ. Art. 5159a; and
WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted .
February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984. further
updated by Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8, 1987, further updated by Resolution
No. 5721 enacted March 14, 1996, and amended by Resolution No. 6138 enacted
December 16, 1998; and
WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect
the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts
shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached
hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes:
Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades
Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction
Exhibit C: Overtime Rate
Exhibit D: Legal Holiday Rate
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per
r diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of
Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided
by law.
Passed by the City Council this 8th day of April. 9 99.
�I
' WINDY S41TO, MAYOR
r' it A EST:
P -
Kayt, i Darnell, City Secretary
APPROVED AS,,TO CONTENT:
Mary Andrews, Managing Director of
Human Resources
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
c
Amy L s, Askistant City Attorney
P ccdocsilloubworks.res
~ I March 25, 1999
i
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
Air Conditioner Installer
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
Asbestos Worker
Asbestos Supervisor
Bricklayer
Bricklayer -Helper
Carpenter
Carpenter -Helper
Cement Finisher
Drywall Hanger
Electrician
Electrician -Helper
Equipment Operator -Heavy
Equipment Operator -Light
Floor Installer
Glazier
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
Insulator -Helper
Iron Worker
Laborer -General
Mortar Mixer
Painter
Plumber
Plumber -Helper
Roofer
Roofer -Helper
Sheet Metal Worker
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
Welder -Certified
Hourly Rate
11.50
12.50
6.25
9.00
12.50
12.50
7.00
11.00
7.00
8.00
11.00
13.75
7.00
9.50
8.50
9.50
10.50
11.50
7.00
1I.00
6.00
6.00
9.50
12.50
7.00
9.00
7.00
10.00
7.00
11.00
7
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft
Asphalt Heaterman
Asphalt Shoveler
Concrete Finisher
Concrete Finisher -Helper
Electrician
Flagger
Form Setter
Form Setter -Helper
Laborer -General
Laborer -Utility
Mechanic
Mechanic -Helper
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
Bulldozer
Concrete Paving Machine
Front End Loader
Heavy Equipment Operator
Light Equipment Operator
Motor Grader Operator
Roller
Scraper
Tractor
Truck Driver -Light
Truck Driver -Heavy
Hourly Rate
9.00
6.00
8.00
7.00
12.00
6.00
7.00
6.25
6.00
6.75
8.00
7.00
7.75
F.00
7.75
7.25
8.00
7.25
9.50
6.75
7.25
7.25
6.50
7.00
M
EXHIBIT C
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair
Labor Standards Act.
EXHIBIT D
r-
Prevailing Wage Rates
Legal Holiday Rate
The rate for legal holidays shall be.as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act.
fr-
r
1.
No Text
Project Book
City of Lubbock
Reese Center, Building #76
Police Academy
9801 Reese Blvd.
Lubbock, Texas
GHA, Inc. Project 9902
April 1999
Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
612 Broadway
Lubbock, Texas 79401
806-749-1153
fax 749-1866
www.greenharvey.com
Set No.
Project Book
City of Lubbock
�. Reese Center, Building #76
Police Academy
r 9801 Reese Blvd.
Lubbock, Texas
GHA Inc. Project 9902
r
April 1999
Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
612 Broadway
Lubbock, Texas 79401
806-749-1153
fax 749-1866
www.greenharvey.com
City of Lubbock
Police Academy
Lubbock, Texas
April 1999
Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
Architects -Planners -Engineers
GHA, Inc. Project 9902
Table of Contents
Bidding Requirements and Conditions of the Contract
Provided by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department
Division 1
General Requirements
01010
Summary of Work
01030
Alternates
01040
Coordination and Meetings
01090
Reference Standards
01300
Submittals
01400
Quality Control
01500
Construction Facilities
01600
Material and Equipment
01700
Contract Closeout
Division 2 Site Work
02514 Concrete Curbs, Walks, and Paving
Division 3 - Concrete
03300 Concrete Work
Division 4 - Masonry
04300 Unit Masonry System
11
SAWPOATAMMTOC TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 1
I
( Division 5 - Metals
05500 Metal Fabrications
05722 Steel Handrail System
Division 6 - Wood and Plastic
06100 Rough Carpentry
06400 Architectural Millwork
Division 7
- Thermal and Moisture Protection
07213
Batt and Blanket Insulation
0.
t
07900
Joint Sealers
Division 8
- Doors and Windows
7
08100
Hollow Metal Frames
08211
Flush Wood Doors
08700
Finish Hardware
t-°
08800
Glazing
Division 9
- Finishes
09260
Gypsum Board Systems
w
09311
Ceramic Tile Finish
09511
Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
r
09650
Resilient Flooring
09688
Carpet - Glue Down
09900
Painting
Division 10 -Specialties
r. 10100 Markerboards and Tackboards
10440 Signs
10800 Toilet Accessories
Division 11 - Equipment
None
Division 12 - Furnishings
12510 Mini Blinds
Division 13 - Special Construction
None
s
Division 14 - Conveying y stv ems
None
S:\WPDATA\"M\7M
t
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC-2
hanical
15010
General Mechanical Provisions
15020
Testing
15060
Piping
15250
Insulation
15400
Plumbing
15804
Ventilating
15840
Ductwork
Division 16
- Electrical
16010
General Electrical Provisions
16110
Raceways
16120
Conductors
16130
Boxes and Fittings
16133
Cabinets
16140
Wiring Devices
16500
Lighting
16770
Security System
SAWPDATA19 OMOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC-3
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART
GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
B.
Coordination of hazardous material.
C.
Owner's responsibilities.
D.
Contractor's use of site and premises.
r
'
E.
Owner occupancy of the facility.
f
F.
Contingency allowances.
G.
Project completion time.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
F- -
A.
Work of this project includes limited interior and exterior renovations as shown and/or described
in the bid documents for this new police academy:
B.
All installed work shall be in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas
Accessibility Standards.
C.
New construction includes new accessible ramp, new concrete walks, limited site grading, new
signage and related miscellaneous work.
y
D.
Perform utility construction and site improvement work as designated on plans. Pay all associated
costs: including, but not limited to frontage fees, connection fees, meter fees, and dump fees. This
includes water, gas, electric, and wastewater service to local utility companys.
1.4 COORDINATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL
r
A.
An Asbestos Survey Report on file with the City of Lubbock indicates no known asbestos -containing
materials within the building or the scope of work. If suspected ACM is discovered, the general
contractor and his subcontractors shall not disturb the material. Only a licensed asbestos abatement
contractor is authorized to disturb/remove asbestos containing material (ACM), while being
monitored by a licensed consultant. The general contractor is to protect and take all necessary
`
precautions to prevent exposure to workers and the public. The disturbance or dislocation of
ACM's may cause asbestos fibers to be released into the atmosphere, thereby creating a potential
health hazard to workmen and the public. The general contractor shall apprise all workers,
supervisory personnel, subcontractors, consultants, etc. who will be in the job site of the seriousness
of the hazard and of proper work procedures which must be followed to avoid asbestos exposure.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1
The general contractor shall take appropriate continuous measures as necessary to protect the public and building workers from the potential hazard of exposure to airborne asbestos. Such measures
shall include the procedures and methods described in regulations of applicable federal, state and
local agencies (OSHA, EPA, TDH, etc.)
B. The general contractor shall prepare a contingency plan for unexpected accidental disturbance of
asbestos containing materials (ACM) and implement the plan as necessary. The owner's
representative shall be notified immediately of any accidental disturbance of ACM. The general
contractor shall be responsible for payment of clean-up of any accidental disturbance of ACM.
Clean-up of ACM shall be done by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor. All clean-up work
shall be in compliance with all regulatory requirements.
C. If any additional materials are discovered, which are suspected of containing asbestos, the general
contractor shall notify the owner's representative immediately. If unforeseen friable ACM is
discovered in the work area specified herein, the general contractor shall stop all work until notified
by fax/letter for the owner's representative to resume. No additional compensation will be allowed
of any delay caused by the discovery of additional ACM.
D. The construction documents for any change order or other agreement that creates or extends
demolition of existing materials into a new area shall document the presence of asbestos -containing
materials, if it exists, and require proper removal, by a licensed abatement contractor, prior to any
general construction.
E. The asbestos abatement contractor shall notify the District ADA Coordinator when his work
weekend is scheduled. Ten (10) days notice is needed to clear some areas for abatement work. The
responsible parties shall coordinate the abatement work in a manner which is least disturbing to
District operations.
1.5 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Assist the contractor in maintaining job site safety by instructing employees, students, and visitors _
of the potential dangers at the site.
B. Provide access for the contractor to portions of the existing site as may be required for this project.
C. Provide parking and storage space for contractor's employees, equipment, and materials.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Limit the use of site and premises to allow:
1. Owner occupancy.
2. Work by others.
3. Use of site and adjacent building premises..
1.7 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. The owner may occupy the site during the period of construction for the conduct of normal
operations. _
B. Cooperate with owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate owner's operations.
1. Temporary interruptions must be scheduled at least 48 hours in advance with the architect. _
2. The hospital is not to be without utilities for any period of time due to this project.
3. Maintain a clear path for emergency vehicles at all times.
C. Schedule the work to accommodate these requirements. �-
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2
S
n
1.8
r
1.9
r"
PART 2
PART 3
D. Contractor is responsible for the safety of visitors to the job site.
E. Coordinate utility interruptions and construction with Reese Center representative.
CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A. There are no allowances in this project.
PROJECT COMPLETION TIME
A. The entire scope of work included in this contract and described herein shall reach substantial
completion within the number of calendar days submitted in the proposal.
B. See Article 8.1 of the General Conditions for definition of Working Days.
C. See Article 8.2 of the General Conditions for computation of Contract Time.
D. See Article 8.3 of the General Conditions for claims for extension of Contract Time.
PRODUCTS
NOT USED
EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 3
SECTION 01030
ALTERNATES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Add Alternate One - gymnastics wall and floor exercise mats in Room 165. Alternate is to include
all mounting hardware and accessories required for a complete installation.
1. Provide 2" thick by 7'-4" high wall mats on four walls, coordinate cut outs for existing
duplex outlets, provide all mounting and support hardware.
2. Provide 6" thick by dimension of room training and throw floor mats, provide anchors and
securing straps to hold mats in place.
3. Acceptable mat manufacturers include:
a. Draper Gymnasium Equipment
b. American Althletic, Inc.
B. Legend:
1. Base Bid.
2. First Add Alternative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
C 1999 Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication Prohibited. ALTERNATES 01030 - 1
SECTION 01040
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Coordination.
B.
Renovation project procedures.
C.
Existing conditions.
D.
Pre -Construction conference.
E.
Pre -Roofing conference.
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
Contractor shall coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of specifications
to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with
provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B.
A separate project schedule shall be provided by the contractor.
C.
Do not commence work at the site until all of the materials and equipment to be incorporated into
the project are on the site or within one day of delivery to the site.
D.
The contractor shall schedule and coordinate the work so that once Notice to Proceed is given and
work commences, the work will progress continually without interruption until the work at the site
is substantially completed.
E.
Contractor shall coordinate completion and clean up of work in preparation for substantial
completion.
F.
Contractor shall coordinate all construction activities and storage of materials with the architect and
owner's representative so as to minimize disruption of activities at the sites.
1.4
RENOVATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
A.
Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and
extending work.
COORDINATION.AND MEETINGS 01040 - 1
C 1999 Gran Harvey Architects, Inc. - -
unauthorivA duplication prohibited.
B. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring
products and finishes to original condition.
C. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work
to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. Notify architect if conditions will not
allow an acceptable transition. '
D. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate
existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to the ._
architect.
1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Underground utilities: Failure of the drawings to show underground utility lines or other concealed
piping, wiring and the like shall not be constructed as a guarantee on the part of the architect or the
owner that such conditions do not exist, though unknown. All operations involving excavation or
removals shall be done at the risk of the contractor who shall take the necessary precautions to
protect employees and the public from injury or death and to avoid damage to existing systems.
B. Damage to existing systems: Whether exposed or concealed, any piping (such as piping for gas,
water, waste, vent, drainage, sewer, heating, or cooling systems, etc.) or wiring (such as wiring
for electric lighting, power, public address, telephone, or signalling systems, etc.) which is
encountered during the construction period and becomes damaged shall be repaired or replaced at
contractor's expense. Only life and property threatening conditions may be repaired prior to a fully
executed field order.
1.6 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Attendance: After award of contract and prior to start of construction, contractor's direct r
representative, major subcontractors, owner's employees responsible for project, architects and
engineers shall attend conference. Time and location as mutually agreed.
B. Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress
schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in contract. _
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
7. Use of premises by owner and contractor.
8. Owner's requirements.
9. Security and housekeeping procedures.
10. Project Schedules.
11. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01040 - 2
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART1
GENERAL
3.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
3.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Quality assurance.
B.
Schedule of references.
C.
Adherence to accessibility standards.
3.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
General Conditions: Reference Standards.
3.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal standards, comply with
requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by
applicable codes.
B.
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of contract documents.
C.
Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents.
D.
Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
E.
The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the contract
documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
3.5
SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES
AA
Aluminum Association
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI
American Concrete Institute
ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act
C 1999 Green Hervey Architects, Inc.
unauthorized duplication Prohibited. REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 1
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
AGA
American Gas Association
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America
AIA
American Institute of Architects
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APA
American Plywood Association
ARI
Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA
American Wood -Preservers' Association
AWS
American Welding Society
AWWA
American Water Works Association
BHMA
Builder's Hardware Manufacturer Association
BIA
Brick Institute of America
CDA
Copper Development Association
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association
FGMA
Flat Glass Marketing Association
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090 - 2
FM
Factory Mutual System
FS
Federal Specification
GA
Gypsum Association
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials,
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association.
MUSFA
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
NECA
National Electrical Contractor Association
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association .
NPCA
National Paint and Coating Association
NRCA
National Roofing Contractor Association
NWMA
National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA
Portland Cement Association
PS
Product Standard
RMA
Rubber Manufacturers Association
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
SDI
Steel Door Institute
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' Association
SSPC
Steel Structures Painting Council
TAS
Texas Accessibility Standards
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090 - 3
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
WWPA Woven Wire Products Association
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 The general contractor and all sub -contractors constructing, installing, or providing materials for this project
shall provide and/or install building components that comply with these standards.
3.2 Special attention shall be given to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Texas Accessibility Standards
(TAS) criteria. The contractors shall make themselves knowledgeable of ADA and TAS criteria and shall
comply with the latest adopted version of these standards and acts.
END OF SECTION
7
l
r
r
1
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Submittal procedures.
B.
Schedule of Values.
C.
Construction Progress Schedules.
D.
Application for Payment.
E.
Shop drawings.
F.
Samples.
G.
Change Procedures.
H.
Manufacturer's instructions.
I.
Manufacturer's certificates.
J.
Submittal Schedule.
K.
AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment.
L.
AIA Form G703 - Continuation Sheet.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty and closeout submittals.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810 or contractor's standard preprinted transmittal form.
Identify the project title, project number, numbers of copies submitted, notice of deviation from
contract documents and any other pertinent data.
B.
Sequentially number the transmittal forms.
C IM Gran Harry Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 1
C. Identify project, contractor, subcontractors or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and specification section number, as appropriate.
D. Coordinate and schedule submittals to expedite the project.
E. Deliver all copies of the submittals to the architect's business address. ._
1.5 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Using AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment, Continuation Sheet, submit
Schedule of Values to Architect.
B. Submit Schedule of Values within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed'. Provide two —
copies.
C. Use the Table of Contents to establish Schedule of Values format. Identify each line item with
number and title of the specification section.
D. Include in each line item any amount of Allowances specified in the project.
E. Include within each line item Contractor's overhead and profit.
F. Each application, revise schedule to list approved Change Orders to date. —
1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to
Proceed for architect's review.
B. Revise and resubmit as required.
C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous
version. .�
D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of work or operation,
identifying first work day of each week.
E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages and other
logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and
duration.
F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of work at each submission.
G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery _
dates, including those furnished by owner and under allowances.
1.7 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for
Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment.
SUBMITTALS 01300 2
r
t
C. Payment period to be as defined in Owner -Contractor Agreement.
D. Include one copy of waiver of liens from each subcontractor.
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings with all product literature, cut sheets, and photographs in a bound format.
B. Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus three copies which will be retained
by the architect and owner. The architect will deliver two copies to owner for their review and
comment.
C. Mark in GREEN INK each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this project. The
architect's review comments will be in RED INK.
D. Apply contractor's stamp, signed, or initialed certifying that review, verification of products
required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in
accordance with the requirements of the work and contract documents. Submittals delivered to the
architect for review that have not been stamped and initialed will be returned without review.
E. Identify variations from contract documents and product or system limitations which may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.
F. Provide space for architect's review stamps.
G. Revise and resubmit shop drawings as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal.
H. Distribute copies of reviewed and approved shop drawings to concerned parties. Instruct parties
to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
I. Provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.9 SHOP DRAWING REVIEW
A. The architect shall affix a stamp upon the submittal with appropriate wording stating if submittal
is accepted, accepted with noted revisions, revise and re -submit, or rejected. Rejected submittals
are to be completely re -worked, assigned a new submittal number, and submitted as a new
submittal.
B. The architect shall provide copies of the submittal to the owner for the owner's review at the same
time the architect is reviewing shop drawings.
C. The contractor shall not begin work or order material for which a submittal is required until a
submittal has been stamped accepted or accepted with noted revisions and returned to the contractor.
D. Schedule submissions at least 14 working days before date reviewed submittal will be needed. The
architect shall be allowed 14 working days for each submittal review.
E. The architect shall notify the contractor when submittals are reviewed and ready for inclusion into
the project.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3
F. The architect shall review the same shop drawing submittal no more than two times. If more than
two submittals are required in order to achieve an accepted submittal, the contractor shall be
charged $100.00 per hour for each review beyond the initial two. The architect's review fee shall
be paid by the contractor in full prior to the release of the accepted shop drawings.
1.10 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing with work.
B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in custom colors
selected, textures, and patterns for architect's selection.
C. Include identification on each sample, with full project information.
D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification sections. Provide at least two
copies of each item being; submitted for review and selection. These copies will not be returned.
E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the work are indicated in individual specification sections.
1.11 CHANGE PROCEDURES
A. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed
change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time
for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate withing seven days.
B. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing
the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for
the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation
and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any
requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600.
C. Architect may issue a directive, on AIA form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by the �.
Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion
in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of
determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. _
D. Architect will issue Change Orders, using AIA G701 - Change Order, for signatures of all parties
as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
1.12 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for
delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified
for product data.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and contract documents.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to architect
for review, in quantities specified for product data.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 4
B. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.Submit supporting
reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable
to architect.
r" PART 2 PRODUCTS
C:
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
01400 ....................
Quality Control .......................
1.8
01500 ....................
Construction Facilities ..................
1.4
...........................................................1.7
.......................................... ...........1.12
01600 ....................
Material and Equipment .................
1.7
i...........................................................1.9
01700 ....................
Contract Closeout ....................
1.3
...........................................................1.6
PP...........................................................1.7
...........................................................1.8
...........................................................1.9
02050 .
Demolition ........... ....ing..
1.3
02514 ....................
Concrete Curbs, Walks, and Pav. .
2.1
......................................................3.4
t.,
02580 ....................
Pavement Marking .....................
1.4
...........................................................3.2
.....................................
....................3.5
03300....................
Concrete ...........................
1.5
...........................................................2.2
r...........................................................2.6
...........................................................2.7
...........................................................3.14
r
04100 ....................
Mortar and Masonry Grout ...............
1.3
04230 ....................
Reinforced Unit Masonry .................
1.4
04300 ....................
Unit Masonry System ...................
1.6
04340 ....................
Reinforced Unit Masonry System ...........
1.5
05722 ....................
Steel Handrail System ...................
1.4
06100 ....................
Rough Carpentry ......................
1.4
06400 ..
Architectural Millwork ...
1.6
07213 .............. • ....
Batt and Blanket Insulation .. , . , .. • .. • . • • • ,
1.6
07900 ....................
Joint Sealers .........................
1.6
08100 ....................
Hollow Metal Frames ...................
1.6
08111 ....................
Steel Doors and Frames ..................
1.6
I
08210 ....................
Wood Doors .........................
1.3
08211 ....................
Flush Wood Doors .....................
1.5
08410 ....................
Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts .........
1.4
r...........................................................1.6
08700 ....................
Finish Hardware ......................
1.8
08800 ....................
Glazing ............................
1.6
M60
Gypsum Board Systems .
1.8
.................... 09311
Ceramic Tile Finish .. • . • • .. • . • . • . • . •
1.5
k ,
„ SUBMITTALS 01300 - 5
09511 .................... Suspended Acoustical Ceilings ....... 1.5
09650 .................... Resilient Flooring ...................... 1.6
09680 .................... Carpet ............................. 1.3
09900 .................... Painting .................... ' , * * .... '1.7
10522 .................... Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets ............ 1.6
10800 ..................... Toilet Accessories ..................... 1.6
12510 .................... Mini Blinds ......................... 1.4 '-
15010.................... General ............................ 1.3
15020.................... Testing ............................ 2.1
15060 .................... Piping ............................. 1.3 r
15250 .................... Insulation ........................... 1.3
15400 .................... Plumbing ........................... 1.3
15804 .................... Ventilating ....................... 1.3
15840 .................... Ductwork ........................... 1.3 _
15870 ................ .. Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers ....... 1.3
16010 .................... General Electrical Provisions .............. 1.4
...........................................................3.4
....................................3.7 --
16110 .................... Raceways ........................... 3.3
16500 ........ ... ... Lighting ............................ 1.3
(This list is provided as a general guideline and is not intended to list all required submittals.)
END OF SECTION
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 6
SECTION 01400
�.,
QUALITY CONTROL
F'
PART1
GENERAL
r
r
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
r--
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General, Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
r
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Quality assurance and control of installation.
r
B.
References.
C.
Field samples.
rD.
Inspection and testing laboratory services.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
r
i
A.
Section 01090 -Reference Standards.
B.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates.
C.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality.
r
D.
Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required and standards for testing.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.
B.
Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
r
C.
Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
D.
Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work except when more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E.
Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F.
Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
`
vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
QUALITY CONTROL 014W - 1
� l999 Green Hovey Arcltitecu, Inc.
�a
i
Unauthorized duplication prohibited—
1.5 REFERENCES
A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of contract documents.
B. Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents.
C. Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the contract
documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
E. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete,
Steel, and Bituminous Materials Used in Construction.
1.6 FIELD SAMPLES _
A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications sections for review.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work.
C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after field sample
has been accepted by architect.
1.7 OWNER'S INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Owner may employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory or owner may use its r
own personnel and facilities to perform inspection and testing laboratory services.
B. If the results provided by the Owner's laboratory differ from the contractor's laboratory report, the —
owner's laboratory shall be final.
C. Work found to be unsatisfactory according to test results, shall be removed from the project and re- _
constructed at contractor's expense.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. The contractor shall employ and pay for a reputable testing laboratory to perform inspections, tests,
and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the architect.
B. The testing laboratory shall be submitted to the architect for review and acceptance two weeks prior
to the first sampling of construction materials.
1. Submittal shall provide years of experience qualifications and certificates of owners, and
name lab representative who will be responsible for this project.
C. Reports will be submitted directly to the architect from laboratory, in duplicate, indicating
observations and results of test and indicating compliance or non-compliance with contract
documents. Copies of reports shall also be sent to the contractor for his use.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 2
D. Cooperate with testing laboratory: furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools,
storage and assistance as requested.
1. Notify testing laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services.
2. Make arrangements with testing laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests
required for contractor's use.
E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the
same testing laboratory on instructions by the architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to
the contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the contract sum.
PART PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 3
SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
PART I GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
i
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
r..
'
A. Sanitary Facilities: Contractor's employees, owner's employees and public.
r
llll
B. Temporary Utilities: Electrical, water, sewer, gas and telephone.
C. Field Offices: Services and size.
i
D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the work, and water control.
i
king g aping, and project signage.
E. Construction Facilities: Parking, progress cleaning,
"
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.
1.4
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facilities may be used by construction
crews so long as facilities are kept clean.
B. Provide suitable temporary toilet facilities at beginning of work. Review proposed toilet facilities location,
and signage with architect prior to installation.
6 r
1.5
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary piping and wiring required for construction.
tom+
t
B. Contractor shall provide construction meter loop for temporary power and pay cost of electrical power
{
used for construction.
�..
C. Contractor shall provide construction water and pay cost of water used for construction.
D. Contractor shall provide all service equipment and gas required for construction.
E. All temporary utility connections and distribution shall be approved by owner and respective local utility
companies, and shall be removed by contractor at completion of construction.
1.6
TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES
A. Existing building may be used as field office.
1.7
BARRIERS
�r-
A. Provide suitable barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas while still allowing access for
owner's use of site. Protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage during construction
operation and demolition. Type of barrier to be used will be at the discretion of the contractor and the
circumstance involved. The contractor to submit proposed barrier for review and approval by owner.
r"
i'
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 1
I
B.
Protect vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
C.
Clearly post warning signs all around the work sites. Signs are to be secured to the barriers.
r
D.
Suitable barriers include durable solid partitions, chain -link fences, temporary dust and acoustic partitions
and woven fabric. Suitable barriers do not include ropes or warning tape tied to saw horses or similar
devices.
E.
Prohibit traffic through landscaped areas.
1.8
WATER CONTROL
A.
Grade site for positive drainage around new construction. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide,
operate, and maintain pumping equipment when necessary.
B.
Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil —
erosion.
1.9
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
B.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in the immediate —
work area so as to minimize damage of installed work.
1.10
PROTECTION OF LANDSCAPING
A.
Prohibit traffic through landscaped areas. Damaged landscape shall be replaced at no cost to owner.
B.
Provide weight dissipating panels under all vehicle tires, tracks, stabilizing arms, and trailer tongues when
traveling across or parked on lawns.
C.
Efforts shall be made to minimize travel on lawns or other landscaped areas. Repair damaged landscaping
to an acceptable condition.
1.11
SECURITY
A.
Contractor shall provide security and facilities to protect work, existing facilities, and owner's operations
directly adjacent to new construction from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
B.
The loss of building materials and/or equipment from the job site will be replaced with same at
contractor's expense. _
C.
Coordinate with owner's security program.
1.12
PARKING
A.
Arrange for temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel.
B.
Coordinate with owner for owner's employee parking.
C.
When site space is not adequate, provide additional off --site parking.
1.13
PROJECT SIGNAGE
A.
Contractor,sub-contractors, owner, and architect are to share one combined sign measuring no more than
4 feet wide and 8 feet high, mounted securely to sign posts. If the contractor wishes to share the sign, the
owner shall review wording and location before sign is installed.
B.
Project sign is to be constructed of weather resistant material, submit sign material for review.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 2
r
�r
C. Project signs are to remain in place until the project is complete. Remove signs only upon reaching
substantial completion.
1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean, orderly condition.
Do not allow lawns or weeds to grow taller than six inches.
r B. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off -site.
�., C. Do not allow hazardous conditions to develop or continue. This shall include lumber with un-pulled nails
I and concrete with projecting rebars.
1.15 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
f A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to substantial
completion inspections.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used
during construction to specified condition.
r
D. Remove all job signs, barriers, fences, controls and repair holes dug for posts; regrade lawn and/or sod
as necessary.
r
1.16 HAUL ROUTE
A. All materials, tools, equipment, etc. shall be transported via the freight elevator. No construction traffic
is to pass through the public lobby.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
.- NOT USED
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
�., NOT USED
END OF SECTION
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 3
i�
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
-
A.
Products.
B.
Transportation and handling.
C.
Storage and protection.
D.
Product options.
E.
Substitutions.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Instruction to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures.
1.4
PRODUCTS
A.
Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming
the work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying,
and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for
salvage and reuse.
B.
Do not reuse materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically
permitted by the contract documents or as approved by the architect.
C.
For similar components provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer.
D.
All materials are to be certified asbestos -free.
E.
Manufacturers shall provide written certification that all equipment and controls are compliant with
Year 2000 guidelines. Such guidelines are to be identified in the Operations and Maintenance
Manual described in Section 01700, Contract Closeout.
1.5
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1999 Gran Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthoriad duplication prohibited.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600 - 1
B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct,
and products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,
or damage.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1 Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in undamaged condition in —
manufacturer's original unopened containers or packaging with identify labels intact and
legible.
2. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to
facilitate inspection prior to installation in order to avoid unnecessary delays in the
construction process.
B. Storage:
1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled
enclosures.
2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
3. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or
protection. --
4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Provide mixing with foreign matter.
6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
C. Handling:
1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by the manufacturer or
as required to protect from damage during storage and installation.
2. Do not handle material in such a way that may leave permanent scars, dents, impressions,
cracks, or blemishes.
1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting those
standards or description.
B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and —
meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Submit
a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2
r
7m
11.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Instructions to bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the
bidding period to requirements specified in this section.
r.,
B. Substitutions may be considered after the bid date only when a product becomes unavailable through
no fault to the contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
contract documents.
D. A request constitutes a representation that the contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level
of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the
work to be complete with no additional cost to owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will reimburse for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities.
E. Will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data
submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the contract
documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
product's equivalence.
3. The architect, after consultation with owner, will notify contractor, in writing, of decision
to accept or reject request.
1.9 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION METHODS OPTIONS
A. Where contract documents indicate no specific method of construction, the contractor shall employ
standard industry practices.
B. Where contract documents indicate a specific method of construction, the contractor shall employ
the method indicated or, at his option, may submit a written request for an alternate method of
construction.
C. Architect/engineer will consider written requests for alternate construction methods, if received in
time as to allow for review and return of such requests and for alternation to be made with no delay
to total construction methods. See contract for total working days allowed.
D. Submit separate requests for each alternate. Support each request with three copes of complete
details and/or documentation for alteration.
1. Indicate changes of materials to be used.
2. Show significant effects of alterations to other affects of alterations to other affected areas.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 4
r
r
rr
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART1
GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Closeout procedures.
B.
Final cleaning.
C.
Adjustments.
D.
Project record documents.
E.
Operation and maintenance data.
F.
Warranties and Certificates.
G.
Spare parts and maintenance materials.
H.
Starting of systems.
1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Submit written certification that contract documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected,
and that work is complete in accordance with contract documents and ready for architect's inspection.
B.
Final payment will be authorized only after all requirements of this section have been met, all punch
list items have been completed and verified by the architect, updated record documents have been
delivered to the architect, and complete operation and maintenance manuals have been delivered to
the architect. Submit final application for payment identifying total adjusted contract sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
1.4 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a new and sanitary condition.
D. Replace all filters of operating equipment with new, clean filters. Provide owner with one complete
set of all filters required for all equipment.
C 1999 Gran Harvey Archiaxea, Inc.
unaudmixed duplication Prohibited. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
1.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
B. If adjustments cannot provide a smooth and unhindered operation, replace product with matching item
that will operate correctly.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the work:
1. Contract drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract.
5. Accepted shop drawings, product data, and samples.
B. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. —
C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. Do not wait to update Record Documents
at the end of work, update as work progresses.
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. —
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by addenda and modifications.
E. Record documents and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction,
showing any and all modifications, including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, —
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. _
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original contract drawings.
F. Submit Record Documents to architect prior to claim for final payment. Architect to transfer
information to original drawings and deliver to owner.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA —
A. Submit two complete sets of operation and maintenance data prior to final inspection. Information
is to be organized on 8-1/2 x 11 inch pages, bound in three ring binders with durable plastic covers.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2
r
B. Prepare binder covers with printed title 'Operation Iand Maintenance Instructions", title of project,
and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
1. Label multiple binders as "Volume I of II" and Volume II of II", as appropriate.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below, with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description
identified.
I E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of architect, contractor,
subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
F. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification
section. For each category, identify names, 'addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and
suppliers. Identify the following:
1. Significant design criteria.
2. List of equipment, make, model, and serial number. Verify that numbers are correct.
3. Parts list for each component.
4. Operating instructions.
5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
G. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
1. All approved shop drawings and product data.
2. Hauling and dumping permits, receipts, and/or manifest.
3. Air and water balance reports.
4. Written statement certifying that all building materials installed in project are asbestos free.
5. Natural gas pressure test and certification.
6. Contractors' Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. Use latest version of AIA
Documents G706 and G706A.
7. Certificates issued by the architect; change orders, addenda, field reports, etc.
8. Photocopies of manufacturers' warranties and bonds.
9. General Contractor's and Sub -Contractors' warranties.
1.8 WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES
A. Provide original warranties and certificates in a bound, 3 ring binder to the owner. Label the binder
"Warranties and Certificates" with project name.
B. Where specifications request warranties and certificates, provide such items requested.
C. Provide required certifications requested by state and local governing agencies.
D. The following are known Texas Department of Health required certificates, other certificates may
be required.
1. Local Fire Marshal approval/acceptance of the building for occupancy.
2. Certification of medical gas systems installation and testing.
3. Certification of fire sprinkler system installation and testing.
4. Certification of fire alarm system.
5. Flame spread/smoke density ratings of carpets and vinyl wall coverings.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3
6. Manufacturer's statement that cubicle curtains are rendered flame retardant.
1.9 WARRANTIES
A. Provide a written warranty on contractor's business letterhead stating that the building is warranted
against defects in material and labor for a period of one year from date of final acceptance.
B. Warranty letter shall also state that installed building components comply with the latest adopted
version of the Texas Accessibility Standards and Americans with Disabilities Act.
C. A letter of warranty shall be provided by the general contractor and each major sub -contractor.
1. Major sub -contractors are those who are responsible for a building system installed in the
building.
1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual
specification sections.
B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed by owner and obtain receipt prior to final
payment.
1.11 STARTING OF SYSTEMS
A. Preparation:
1. Notify architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each system.
2. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage.
3. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
4. Verify wiring and support components are complete and tested.
5. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's and owner's representatives
in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
6. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble shooting, servicing —
maintenance and shutdown of each piece of equipment to owner's personnel two weeks prior
to date of final inspection.
7. Amount of time to be devoted to instruction shall be reasonable and consistent with size of
installation and its complexity.
PART PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION _
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4
F
j
k
i
7
r
E
SECTION 02514
CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, AND PAVING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of
this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of concrete curbs, walks, and paving is shown on the drawings.
B. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for materials, testing,
mixing, placing, and curing, except as specified otherwise.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Forms:
1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement
and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight
and free of distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split, or defective form materials are not
permitted.
2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.
3. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not discolor or
otherwise deface the surface of the concrete.
B. Concrete: Comply with applicable requirement of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for concrete
materials. Concrete -mix shall not be the same as used for building slabs and foundations. Exterior
concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days and shall contain 6
sacks (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 6% plus or minus 1 % of entrained air, coarse
aggregate 1" or smaller, and shall be poured with a slump of 5" plus or minus 1".
C. Expansion Joints: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2"
thickness by depth of slab less 1/2" below top of concrete. At curbs and gutters, furnish special
section to meet local curb and gutter specifications. All exterior expansion joints are to have the
top 1/2" depth filled with gray exterior grade sealant, submit sealant to architect.
D. Color Admixtures: Submit range of available color admixtures for review, selection, and approval.
Colored concrete shall be used at accessible ramps and as shown on drawings.
1999 Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
r unauthorized duplication prohibited.
CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, AND PAVING
02514 - 1
E. Tactile Texture: Submit proposed tactile texture for review, selection, and approval. Tactile
pattern shall comply with Texas Accessibility Standards,, 4.29.2..
F. Reinforcement admixtures: Contractor shall provide fiberglass reinforcement in all mix recipes to
the ration recommended by manufacturer. Fiber Crete is an acceptable product.
1. Provide steel reinforcement shown on drawings in addition to fibers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subbase surface immediately before
placing concrete.
3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient lengths of
forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24
hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks and paving shall slope at least 1/8" per foot.
B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances:
1. Top of form units: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet.
2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet.
C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form oil as often as required to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for mixing and placing
concrete and as herein specified.
2. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade.
Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at ,the time
concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they _
have been brought to the required grade and alignment.
3. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix and as little rehandling
as possible. Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints
with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use
only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to
prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels and joint devices. Do not over vibrate.
4. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as
possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. Sections less
than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. Remove such
sections if directed by the architect.
B. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curbs and gutter placement at contractor's
option, if acceptable to the architect. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design
and laboratory test results which meet or exceed the minimums herein specified. Machine --
placement must produce curbs and gutters to the required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and
CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, AND PAVING 02514 - 2
r
3.4
3.5
jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with
formed concrete as specified.
JOINTS
A. General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction) and construction joints true -to line
with face perpendicular to surface to the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse
joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown.
B. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning
concrete into areas equal to width of walk or as shown on the drawings. Walks 5 feet wide shall
have joints at 5 feet on center, 4 feet wide walks to have joints at 4 feet on center and so on.
Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness.
C. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a
recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where
placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such pour
terminates at expansion joints.
1. Construction joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway section forms.
E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other .fixed objects.
1. Expansion joints shall be at 20 feet on center, unless otherwise shown.
2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint and not less than 1/2" or more than 1"
below finished surface. Whenever possible furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the
full width being placed. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler
sections together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete.
3. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other
temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are placed.
CONCRETE FINISHING
61
2
Finishes:
1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons, and porches shall be floated with a light broom finish, to
provide non -slip finish.
Curbs, gutters, and driveway approaches shall be finished with a stiff -bristled broom to
provide non -slip finish. Provide sample for review and approval.
Provide tactile surfaces on walks that lead to or through hazardous conditions according
to the Americans with Disabilities Act. Provide sample for review and approval.
B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed:
1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating.
Do not use "jitterbugs". Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible.
Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture.
2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as
required to remove surface irregularities and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous
smooth finish.
3. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool
and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete
surface.
CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, AND PAVING 02514 - 3
4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared,
complete surface finishing as follows:
a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface, "—
perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line
texture acceptable to the architect.
b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface
with a stiff -bristled broom.
3.6 CURING
A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, curbs, gutters and paving, complying with the applicable
requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work. Use moist -curing methods whenever possible for
first 24 hours, then apply curing compound.
3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS
A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete as directed by architect.
B. Drill test cores where directed by architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or
defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete
bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder or with polysulphide resin grout, complying
with FS MMM-G650B CANC.
C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least
14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Sweep concrete pavement and walks free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material
just prior to final inspection.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, AND PAVING 02514 - 4
r
SECTION 03300
CONCRETE WORK
r
PART1 GENERAL
Ir' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
.. Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
f A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings.
f B. Metal Stair Nosings.
I
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
7 A. Section 02514 - Concrete Curbs, Walks, and Paving.
a
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provision of the following codes, specifications and
r standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
l 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings"
2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
r Placing Concrete"
3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection"
4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete"
5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Reinforced Concrete"
6. MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice"
B. Workmanship: The contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not
conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient
concrete as directed by the architect.
C. Design and Testing
1. The contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory
designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual
cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the architect. A proven,
established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of
5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix.
C 1999 Green Hwwy Associates, Inc.
r Unauthorized duplication prohibited. CONCRETE WORK
03300 - 1
D. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at contractor's expense, a testing laboratory acceptable to
architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
1. Job site cylinders shall be taken as directed by the architect. The contractor shall notify
the testing laboratory. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders
and be responsible for their care and handling, including breaking same at laboratory.
2. Test results shall be furnished to the architect, engineer, and the contractor.
3. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the architect,
at any time during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and
facilities at all items. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the owner's expense,
including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the
contractor's expense.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, patterns, stair nosings and others as requested by
the architect.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structure" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of
concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete
structures.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork -'
for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable
panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest
practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the _
Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed
concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or good as
new.
i
B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class
I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark
of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished
structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on
at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square
spot footings are shown on the drawings.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 2
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 x 6 - W2.1 x W2.1, welded steel fabric unless other wise
noted.
C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 60
or ASTM A 499.
D. Supports for Reinforcement:
1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices
for spacing supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use
wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick,
and other devices will not be acceptable.
2. For slab -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base
material will not support chair legs.
3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs which are hot -dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless
steel protected.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C 150, type I, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to
architect.
B. Fine Aggregate:
1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud,
loam or foreign matter as follows:
1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted.
3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size:
a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-
third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars of bundles or bars.
b. The limitations may be waived if, in the judgement of the architect, workability
and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without
honeycomb of voids.
D. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1 kA chloride
ions.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 3
G. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:
1. Type B, Retarding
2. Type C, Accelerating --
3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding
4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating
H. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by
Architect.
I. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G containing
not more than 0.1 % chloride ions.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated
otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab.
B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per square
yard, complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film. _
3. Polyethylene -coated burlap.
D. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A.
1. Guardian Chemical Company, clear bond at the rate of 400 square feet to the gallon.
E. Hardening, Sealing, and Dustproofmg: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. All exposed slabs not
covered with tile on other applied surface finish shall receive second application where construction
work is complete.
1. A second application of Guardian Chemical Company, Clear Bond at the rate of 600 square
feet to the gallons over the curing compound cost.
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable —'
provisions of ASTM C 94. Use and independent testing facility acceptable to the architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used
for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the architect. --
B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials
to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1.
C. Submit written reports to the architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by
the architect.
D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the
Drawings and schedules:
1. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46
maximum (air entrained).
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 4 _
i.
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes. Mix design adjustments may be requested by the contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant,
l at no additional cost to the owner and as accepted by the architect. Laboratory test data for revised
l mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the architect before using in
the work.
2.6 ' ADMIXTURES
A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in
concrete as required for placement and workability.
B. Use color admixture in concrete where noted and at pattern concrete locations. Submit color
selection chart for approval. Color admixture is to be added at the mixing plant, not at the site.
C. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50
degrees F.
D. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -
entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of
placement having air content within the following limits:
1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate
2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate
r3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate
4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate
E. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
directions.
F. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing
at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control.
2.7 SLUMP LIMITS
A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows:
1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3".
2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3".
3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition
of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete.
4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4".
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein
specified.
B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with
insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted.
C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing
time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 5
D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
2.9 PATTERN CONCRETE
A. Submit slate design patterns for use in the four concrete paving sections and along glass under the
entrance canopy where shown on plans. Submit tactile flat domes pattern at ramps.
B. Pattern concrete shall meet the same specifications as required for other concrete paving in this
project.
C. All pattern concrete is to have pigmented concrete, color to be selected by, architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMS
A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain' formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might
be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so
concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete
surface and adjacent materials.
C. Forms shall not leak cement paste.
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surface.
Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms
only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling,
and for easy removal.
E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is in accessible for cleanout, for
inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary
openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on _
forms at inconspicuous locations'.
yi
F. Chamfer exposed comers and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and.tight edge joints.
G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designated
to prevent form defection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. r
H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least
1-1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger
than I" diameter in concrete surface. '—
I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for
other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing
such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 6 ^
r4
J. Cleaning and Tightening: ThorvU` clean formsand ad acent surfaces to receive concrete.
i g 8 yj
Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms
after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
' 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING
A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's
.. recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports, and as herein specified.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
rC. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against, displacement by formwork,
construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not
use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction.
3.3 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints
1. Locate and install construction joints, where are not shown on the drawings, so as not to
impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the architect.
2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between
walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all
reinforcement across construction joints.
B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground:
1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed.
Use screed type joints equal to those manufacturer by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc.
Screed key joints are of 24 gauge galvanized steel with 1 1/8" dowel knockouts at 6" on
centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gauge by 1" stakes per ten feet of length
of material.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of
contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls,
grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
CONCRETE WORK
03300 - 7
A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by 'suppliers of the items to be attached thereto.
B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkhead and intermediate screed strips
for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finishes slab surface. Provide and
secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface
to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type
screeds.
3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
3.6
A. Coat the contact surface of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed.
Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor
adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces
requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing
compounds.
B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, in amount, and under conditions
of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating
material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which
fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General:
1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched
in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this types of concrete. Mix batched
concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's
instruction and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion.
3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed
on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of
weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
construction joints as herein specified.
4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing.
B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect, and complete the formwork
installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit
the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required.
Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings
are not used.
C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and
in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -
spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element
submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced location not farther than the visible effectiveness of the
machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At
each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 8
r
ig
concrete and Complete ei%nbedmbrit of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing segregation of the mix.
D. Placing Concrete Slabs
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of
construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate
concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers.
2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats
or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle
water on the plastic surface. Do not dipturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing
operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations.
E. Cold Weather Placing
1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which would be caused
by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein
specified.
2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly
heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of
placement.
3. Do not use frozen materials or material containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
F. Hot Weather Placing
1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete on compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement
below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control
the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total
amount of mixing.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot so that the steel and
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment
in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete.
4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work
or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having
the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as
specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 114" in height rubbed down with wood blocks.
B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered
with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the
concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar system. This is the as -
cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and
r parched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and
m
. smoothed.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces
occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for tile or other bonded applied cemendtious finish flooring material, _
and as shown on the drawings.
1. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/2" in 10 feet when tested
with a 10 foot straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drams where required. After
leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and _
other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane
or elastic roofing, and as shown on the drawings or in schedules.
1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for
floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened
sufficiently to permit operation'of power -driver floats or both. Consolidate surface with
power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units.
Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with —
a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces
to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
C. Trowel finish:
1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless
otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint, or —
other thinfilm finish coating system.
2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8"
in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which
would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Non -Slip Broom Finish:
1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platform, steps and ramps, walks and
elsewhere as shown on the drawings or in schedules.
2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming
perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the architect —
before application.
E. Pattern Finish:
1. Apply pattern finish to exterior concrete ramps as shown on the drawings.
2. Use only the approved pattern finish as submitted.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 10
r1. Protect freshly placed concrete Iibtii premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period
of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening.
LW 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface
( after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than
72 hours.
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has
IL dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive)
during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid
OM rapid drying at end of final curing period.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing
or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.
1. Provide moisture curing by following methods:
a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous
water -fog spray.
b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating
cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to
'
provide coverage of concrete surface and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture -cover curing 'as follows:
.
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed
in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by
waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows:
�.
a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final
finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours).
b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance
with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within
3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing
I
damage during this curing period.
C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surface which are to be covered
r-
with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener,
waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other
`
coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the architect.
C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surface, including undersides of beams, supported
slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until
forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as
applicable.
D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces by moist curing.
1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless specified otherwise, by methods specified above, as
applicable.
2. Final cure concrete surfaces" to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of
moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar
parts of the work, maybe removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24
hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form
removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beams, soffits, joists, slabs and other structural
elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum
compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength if inplace concrete by
testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.
C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical
supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or
disturbing shores and supports.
3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or
otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound
material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork.
B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins --
and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use
patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to architect.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling -in: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,
unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete
as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling
shown or required to complete work.
B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where
indicated on the drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during
concrete placement.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas: --
1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms,
but only when acceptable to architect.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/3" in any dimension, and holes left by tie —
rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 ". Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or
proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the
areas to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent.
3. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement
so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. —
Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 12
7
r
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces:
1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to
satisfaction of architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities; cracks;
spalls; air bubbles; honeycomb; rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and
stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie
holes, fill with dry pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding
agent.
2. Where possible, repair concealed formed surfaces that contain defects that adversely affect
the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces
1.
Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, form smoothness and to verify surface
plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as
herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition
to smoothness, using a template having required slope.
2.
Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability
of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or
which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless
of width, spalling, pop -puts, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable conditions.
3.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14
days.
4.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after, completion of
surface finishing operation by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete.
Finish repaired -areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may
be used when acceptable to architect.
5.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 " diameter,
by cutting out- and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound
concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance
all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with
a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same
materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place,
compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as
adjacent concrete.
6.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry pack
method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout
coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry pack, consisting of one part pordand cement
to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as
required for handling and placing. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match
adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by architect.
E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of architect.
3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports.
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following,
as directed by the Architect.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 13
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231
pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test _
specimens.
4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and
when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made.
5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each —
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
6. Compressive Strength Tests: 'ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction —
thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface
area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28
days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. _
The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested
at 28 days.
a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given
class on concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or -
from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.
b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the
strength test may be waived by the architect, if, in his judgement, adequate
evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 % of companion
laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. —
C. Test results will be reported in writing to the architect, engineer and the contractor on the same day
that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing services, concrete type and
class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete
mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests _
and 28-day tests.
D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test
results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in
the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determined
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be
required when unacceptable concrete is verified.
3.15 TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS
A. All new concrete walks, sloped walks, ramps, curb cuts, curb ramps, surface textures, and
dimensions shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards of the Architectural Barriers Act,
Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes.
B. New and renovated concrete surfaces shall provide at least a 2% positive slope away from accessible
routes. Do not allow any water to stand within accessible routes.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 14
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in
this Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Concrete unit masonry backup walls, complete with reinforcement and anchorages.
B.
Built-in items supplied by other trades.
C.
Cut and fit for items furnished and installed by other trades.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 - Concrete Work.
B.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication.
C.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
D.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with requirements of ANSI A 41.1, unless
indicated otherwise herein.
1.5
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C 90-95 Hollow load bearing CMU.
B.
ASTM C 91 Masonry Cement
C.
ASTM C 140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Unit.
D.
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement.
E.
ASTM C 207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
F.
ASTM C 216 Facing Brick.
G.
ASTM C 270 Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
H.
ASTM C 426 Test for Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - l
I. ASTM C 476 Specification for Grout for Masonry.
J. ASTM A 82 Cold -Drawn Steel Wire - Plain for Reinforcement.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Compliance: Manufacturer's certification that masonry units furnished meet or
exceed requirements of this section.
B. Test Reports: Certify that concrete masonry units and mortar mix proposed conform to the —
following:
1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C140 and C426.
2. Mortar: ASTM C270.
C. Product literature of items specified; include manufacturer's literature on sizes, maintenance,
cleaning, water repellent, and graffite control.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials off ground and protected from wetting by capillary action, rain or snow and
protected from mud, dust or other material and contaminating material.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS —
A. Hot Weather Requirement:
1. Protect all masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours after —
erection when ambient air temperature exceeds 99 degrees F and when shaded with relative
humidity less than 50 percent.
2. Provide suitable coverings or barriers to deflect direct sunlight and wind.
B. Temperature: No masonry work shall be conducted when ambient temperature is falling and below
50 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS —
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Concrete Masonry Units.
1. Featherlite Building Products.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8"
x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. Thicknesses as indicated on the drawings.
2. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints,
headers, bonding and other special conditions. —
3. Hollow Loading -Bearing CMU: ASTM C 90-95, Grade "N".
4. Weight: Provide lightweight units using aggregate complying with ASTM C 331
producing dry net unit weight of not more than 105 lbs. per cubic foot, unless otherwise
indicated.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 2
r5. Curing: Cure units in a moisture-eontrolled. atmosphere or in an autoclave and normal
` pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90-95, Type I.
a. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the
maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative
t humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site.
r
B. Mortar:
1. Mortar mixes: Conform to ASTM C 270, and the following:
a. Type ,"S" Mortar, for all masonry. One part Portland Cement, 1/4 to 1/2 part
hydrated lime, 2-3/4 to 4-1/2 parts damp loose sand or 1/2 part Portland Cement,
1 part masonry cement, 3-3/8 to 4-1/2 parts damp loose sand.
2. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, one sack 94# net, considered one cubic foot.
3. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 furnished in sacks containing one cubic foot each, marked
with the weight. One sack considered one cubic foot. Exterior masonry cement shall
contain integral waterproofing. Masonry cement shall be manufactured by Atlas, Lehigh,
Lonestar, Trinity or an approval equal.
4. Sand: (Fine Aggregate) 80# damp, considered one cubic foot ASTM C 144 of acceptable
color graded within the following limits:
SIEVE NO. PERCENT OF SAND RETAINED
MAX. (BY WEIGHT) MIN.
4 0 0
8 5 0
16 40 0
30 65 30
50 85 65
100 98 85
5. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil acids, soluble salts, and organic
impurities.
6. Colors shall be as selected by architect.
7. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents.
8. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
C. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchoring Devices:
1. Zinc -Coated Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire, ASTM A 641, Class 3 for zinc
coating.
2. Joint Reinforcement: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods
and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet. Fabricate from cold -
drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, and a unit width of 1-1/2" to 2" less than
thickness of wall or partition, with prefabricated comer and tee units, and as follows:
a. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9 gauge diameter.
b. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9 gauge diameter.
C. For multi-wythe or cavity exterior masonry back-up fabricate units with additional
side rods spaced for embedment in inside face of back-up wythe.
3. Miscellaneous Masonry Anchors: Fabricated from 16 gauge steel sheet or 3/8" steel rod,
1.5 oz. hot -dip zinc coating after fabrication.
D. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories:
1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 of the sizes shown.
2. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: Provide the following formed to the shape shown.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 3
a. Bond Breaker Strips: 30 lb. asphalt roofmg felt complying with ASTM D 226,
or 30 lb., coal -tar roofing felt complying with ASTM D 227.
b. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer
hardness of 60,to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral
stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated.
3. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic as recommended by masonry manufacturer.
4. Provide pre -cast concrete apple logo: on each face of the outer most band of masonry
columns along the entrance, see drawings. Precast units of art work provided,
approximately 9 x 10 king brick module'. McC Masonry Casting Corp., Amarillo, 1-806- _
359-4912.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine other construction which is to support or interface with masonry work for conditions that
would prevent proper installation of masonry.
B. Where footings and shelves are not sound or level, where anchorage devices have not been installed,
where interfaces exist, or where there are other conditions unsuitable for proper installation of
masonry, do not start masonry work until other construction has been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install masonry units in running bond to match the existing masonry patterns.
B. Cut exposed masonry units, where necessary with a power saw.
1. Avoid the use (by proper layout) of less than half size units.
C. Hold uniform joint sizes of 3/8", unless otherwise indicated. Hold joint sizes to suit modular size
of masonry units.
D. Cut joints flush and tool slightly concave, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Build other work into the masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other work, and
grouting for secure anchorage.
F. Protect newly laid masonry from exposure to precipitation, excessive drying, freezing, soiling,
backfill and other harmful elements.
G. At end of each day's work, use a medium soft dry nylon brush to clean masonry work.
H. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing:
1. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed
longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on
exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" at
ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of
prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for
continuity. ._
2. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows:
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 4
a. For multi-wythe, walls where . continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as
structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by code but
not less than 16" o.c. vertically.
I b. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing
placed in two horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel
and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening,
bridging control joints where provided.
I
I. Anchoring Masonry Work:
1. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown as specified. If not shown or specified,
provide standard type for facing and back-up involved.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to
comply with following:
a. Provide an open space not less than I" in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid
materials.
b. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry
joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections and
metal compatibility unless otherwise indicated.
C. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 16" o.c. horizontally.
d. Bond intersecting walls with masonry units or provide anchors spaced 16" o.c.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external comers which may be damaging completed work.
B. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar.
C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
D. At end of each day or shutdown period, protect all exposed walls by covering with a strong
waterproof membrane, extending at least two feet down each side of wall and secured in place.
3.4 POINTING AND CLEANING
A. ' After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample panels before proceeding with cleaning of entire masonry
work.
3. Clean brick masonry by bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA
"Technical Note No. 20 Revised" using the following cleaner:
a. Acidic cleaner approved by unit masonry manufacturer.
4. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and
applicable NCMA "Tek" bulletins.
5. Clean accessories of all excess mortar.
B. On completion, point up all exposed masonry. Cut out defective joints and repoint where necessary.
Reclean masonry as necessary.
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 5
C. Remove white scum from masonry with Sure Klean White Scum Remover, PorSoCo, Inc.,
telephone 913-281-2700. —
END OF SECTION
r
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 6 —'
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal.
1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03300 - Concrete Work: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.
B. Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Structural joist.
B. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel
B. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
C. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed and
Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
D. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
E. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.
F. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
G. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
H. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
I. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and
Shapes.
1999 Gran Harvey Archite=, Inc.
unauthorind duplication prohibited. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
J. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
K. ASTM B177 - Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use.
L. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
M. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
N. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and
type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where
applicable.
C.
Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Prepare shop drawings under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer. experienced
in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
B.
Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300, certifying welders employed on
the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
The contractor shall verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
It shall be the responsibility of the fabricator to accurately construct items to meet required
dimensions.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36. —
B.
Plates: ASTM A283.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325.
D.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
E.
Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
2.2
FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
METAL FABRICATIONS' 05500 - 2
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight,
flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D.
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;
consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
E.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
l
t
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.
2.3
FINISHES
foreign finishing.
A.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and matter prior to
B.
Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
a
C.
Prime paint items with two coats.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
r
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B.
Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
d
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to
r
appropriate sections.
a
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Obtain architect's approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
�.,, METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise noted.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS ' 05500 - 4
SECTION 05722
STEEL HANDRAIL SYSTEM
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The extent of metal handrailing is shown on the drawings.
B.
All handrails have radius turns, top rail radius down and returns in line with lower rail, and radius
changes in direction.
C.
Casting metal sleeves in concrete to receive metal posts.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 - Concrete Work.
B.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
C.
Section 09900 - Painting.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. Prepare and submit shop drawings and product data indicating component details,
materials, finishes, connections, joining methods, and wall anchors.
2. Prepare and submit dimensioned layout of all cast in place components; pipe sleeves,
grounds, anchors, etc.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for non custom components.
D.
Submit color chart for paint color selection.
1.5
REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials
1. A36/a36M-91 Structural Steel
2. A53-90 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless
B.
American Welding Society
1. D1.1-88 Structural Welding Code -Steel
C.
The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's
1. Metal Stairs Manual, 1982
�oep�ibiInc.
unar� �iioPro STEEL HANDRAIL SYSTEM 05722 - 1
D. Texas Accessibility Standards of the Architectural Barriers Act
1. Paragraphs 4.9, 4.26, and related portions of the act
2. Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation, 512-463-3211
E. ASTM E894 - Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Railings for Buildings.
1.6 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Handrail assemblies and attachments shall withstand a minimum concentrated load of 250 lb./ft
applied at any point on the top rail.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver embedded items, templates, and accessories to job site in a timely manner.
B. Deliver materials to the job site in good condition and properly protected against damage to finished
surfaces.
C. Store material in a clean, dry location away from water, mud, uncured concrete, and heavy traffic.
Cover with waterproof paper or polyethylene sheeting that will allow air circulation.
D. During installation and final placement, minimize handling and exercise particular care to avoid
damage to finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Standard Weight, outside diameter of 1 1/2", primed ready for painting.
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fasteners: Minimize the use of exposed fasteners. If required, use semi -concealed bolts and
screws. Exposed bolts and screws shall have countersunk heads with ends of bolts and screws -"
dressed flush after nuts are set.
B. Reinforcement: Insert and weld reinforcement sleeves into core of pipe at stress points.
C. Welding:
1. Structural steel, AWA D1.1 and sheet steel, AWS D1.3. _
2. Where possible, locate welds on unexposed side.
3. Grind exposed welds smooth and true to contour of welded member. Remove welding
splatter.
4. Touch up welds and grindings with primer. D. Remove all sharp edges and burrs, touch up primer.
E. Shop Primer: Prepare surface, and apply primer as specified for ferrous metals in Section 09900,
Painting.
F. Fabricate railings, including handrails, from steel pipe with flush coved joints. Connections may
be standard fittings designed for welding, or coped or mitered pipe with full welds.
STEEL HANDRAIL SYSTEM 05722 - 2
G. Return top rail ends of handrail down and back to line up with lower rail.
H. Space intermediate posts not over six feet on center between turning post or end post.
2.3 FINISHES
PART
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
A. Paint completed pipe rail system according to Section 09900, Painting. Color to be selected from
submitted color chart.
3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Supply items to be cast in concrete to appropriate crew in adequate time for proper installation. The
railing system contractor shall provide proper templates and supervision during installation to insure
correct placement.
B. Dissimilar metals and components in contact with cement shall be kept from direct contact by a
heavy coat of asphaltic or bituminous paint.
C. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance to approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Erect work plumb and level to horizontal surfaces and parallel to sloping surfaces or rake of stairs
to within 1/8 inch in twelve feet.
C. Provide expansion joints as needed to allow for thermal expansion and contraction.
FIELD PRIME PAINTING
A. When installation is complete; clean field welds, burrs, and sharp edges to bright metal.
B. Completely coat areas where shop primer has been disturbed using matching primer.
CLEANING
A. When installation is complete, wash thoroughly using clean water and soap; rinse with clean water.
B. Do not use acid solution, steel wool or other harsh abrasives.
C. If stain remains after washing, consult manufacturer for instructions of stain removal.
D. Damaged or permanently stained components shall be removed from the site and replaced with new
components.
E. Protect installed work from damage until entire project is accepted.
END OF SECTION
STEEL HANDRAIL SYSTEM
05722 - 3
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof curbs and cants; blocking in wall and roof openings; wood furring and grounds; concealed
wood blocking.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication.
B. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following agencies:
1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
B. Meet or exceed ASTM E 84 criteria.
C. Meet or exceed UL 723:PR-S criteria.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, WWPA.
B. Fire resistant treated 2 x 6: NFPA.
2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded.
B. Particleboard Roof Sheathing: ANSI A208.1 wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; sanded
faces.
C. Plywood Floor Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing Span Rating; sanded.
1999 Gran Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Plywood Underlayment: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded.
B. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1; wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; sanded
faces.
2.4 ACCESSORIES -"
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations, plain finish
elsewhere.
B. Die Stamped Connectors: Galvanized steel.
C. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type
for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.
2.5 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure
impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 25 or _
less.
1. D-Blaze, Bowie -Sims -Prange Treating Corporation.
B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C 1 using water -born preservative with
0.25 percent retainage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FRAMING
A. Erect wood framing members in accordance with applicable code. Place members level and plumb.
Place horizontal members crown side up.
B. Curb all roof openings except where curbs are provided. Construct curb members of single pieces
per side.
3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Site apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Treat site -sawn cuts. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on untreated wood in contact
with cementitious materials roofing and related metal flashings.
C. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
3.3 CONCEALED GROUNDS
A. Provide fire resistant concealed grounds in framing as required for secure anchoring of wall
mounted building components.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2
d'
s
SECTION 06400
R
4
ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK
r`
PART
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A. Special fabricated cabinet units.
r
B. New countertops on new cabinet units.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
l
l
B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Grounds.
C. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior,
1.4
REFERENCES
A. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
B. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact.
C. NWMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
D. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial PIywood.
E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
F. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative PIywood.
G. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard.
t ;
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
r
A. Perform work to custom quality in accordance with Quality Standards of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute (AWI).
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
r
B. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details,
accessory listings, and schedule of finishes.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 1
r
D. Submit fire treated lumber certificate under provisions of Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6
percent; species and grade as follows:
iTF�I SPECIES S�iLT
Cabinet Frame White Pine Plain Sliced
Exposed Frame Red Oak Plain Sliced
B. Hardwood Lumber FS MM-L-736; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content
of 6 percent; species and grade as follows:
ITEM SPECIES �1LT
Exposed Frame Red Oak Plain Sliced
C. Cabinet concealed wall grounds are to be fire treated lumber; submit certificate for review. Refer
to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Wood Particleboard: Per AWI standard, composed of wood chips, made with high waterproof
resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces, located as follows:
ITEM: Shelving; Bulkheads; Non -exposed tops, bottoms and ends.
B. Hardboard: PS 58; pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, smooth two sides,
located as follows:
ITEM: Drawer Bottoms; Cabinet Backs; Drawer Faces and Doors; Edges of shelves, drawers
faces, and door faces.
C. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI; core material of particleboard; species
and cut as follows:
ITEM: Underlayment
D. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI; core material of particleboard; type
of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cut as follows:
ITEM FACE SPECIES M
Door and Drawer Fronts Red Oak Rotary
Drawer Construction White Pine Plain Sliced
ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 2
7
i
4.
2.3 ACCEPTABLE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS
A. Wilsonart Manufacturing.
B.
Formica.
I,
C.
Nevamar.
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.4
LAMINATE MATERIALS
rA.
Plastic Laminate: NWMA LD 3, GP - 50 general purpose type; color as listed in plastic laminate
schedule at the end of this section.
I
2.5
ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application.
17
B.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
I
C.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.
D.
Computer Keyboard: Micro Computer Accessories, Inc. No. 620 with mouse tray No. 6295.
E.
Grommets and Sleeves: 2 inch round hole, similar to Valencia 44-N027384, black.
i
2.6
HARDWARE
A.
Shelf Standards and Rests: K & V No. 255AN and 256AN.
B.
Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley No. 4484.
C.
Catches: Stanley No. SP46.
D.
Drawer Slides: K & V No. 8500, full extension, 150 lb. rated.
E.
Drawer Lock and Key: Stanley, finish to match cabinet hardware.
F.
Hinges: Grass America No. 1203 with appropriate base plates.
G.
Closet Rod: K&V No. KV2.
2.7
FINISHES
A.
Submit full range of manufacturer's finishes for selection by architect.
B.
Provide examples to architect of all finishes under consideration.
P
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
All millwork is to be flush overlay construction per the Architectural Millwork Institute.
B.
Ship assembled casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through
building openings.
ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 3
C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges to have less than 1/16 inch gap in any joint. Exposed edges
to have hardwood edges. - _
D. Door and drawer fronts: 3/4 inch thick with hardwood edges.
E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide
trim for scribing and site cutting. All field cuts through laminate are to have two coats of adhesive
in order to minimize laminate deterioration at plumbing fixtures. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make
corners and joints hairline. Slightly bevel arrises.
G. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern.
H. Provide cutouts for grommets and sleeves, plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and —
other fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal contact
surfaces of cut edges.
I. All shelf standards are to be recessed flush with adjacent surface. All units with adjustable shelves,
either open shelves or closed cabinets, are to have recessed metal standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION .
A. Verify adequacy and location of backings and support framing members that are concealed within
walls.
B. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. —
3.2 HARDWARE
A. Provide twenty-four (24) drawer lock and key assemblies, location of locks to be selected by
owner.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb, and level.
B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments at concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C. Carefully scribe casework which is against other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/32 inch —
maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
D. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. _
E. Do not cut hole for equipment cord grommet through counter top until unit is completely installed
and approved. Actual locations of grommets will be verified by architect prior to cutting hole.
See millwork elevations for general locations. —
F. Provide concealed grounds in all wall framing areas to receive wall and base cabinets, refer to
Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 4
r
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function
smoothly and correctly.
B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
3.5 Plastic Laminate Schedule
A. Color as selected by owner.
END OF SECTION
ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK
r
SECTION 07213
BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2
RELATED WORK
A.
Provide rigid cavity wall type insulation at masonry construction and unfaced batt insulation at
exterior stud walls where shown on the drawings.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 04230: Reinforced Unit Masonry.
B.
Section 04300: Unit Masonry System.
C.
Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
D.
Section 07105: Dampproofmg and Waterproofing.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by
r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick,
measured by test method included in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are
expressed by the temperature causing one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean
temperatures indicated.
B.
Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose
fire performance characteristics as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part,
have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Contractor shall be an established firm regularly engaged in installation of wall insulations for the
past five years.
1.5
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84.
B.
Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
C.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1999 Green Harvey Archi=u. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION
07213 - 1
D. Thermal Performance: ASTM C653.'
E. Acoustical Performance: ASTM C665. --
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation
required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
B. Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing _
compliance with specified performance values, including R-values (aged values for plastic
insulations), densities, compression strengths, fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water
absorption ratings, and similar properties. —
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or
snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during
installation. All materials damaged from above instances will not be used and will be disposed of
properly from the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Rigid Insulation:
1. Dow Chemical Corporation.
2. UCI Industries, Inc.
3. DiversiFoam Products, Inc.
B. Batt Insulation:
1. Owens/Corning Corporation.
2. CertainTeed _
C. Substitutions:
1. In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sound attenuation batts to be equal to Owens/Corning for 3 1/2 inch thick cavity, flame spread 0-25,
smoke developed of 50.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation board shall be the type recommended by the insulation —
manufacturer, and complying with fire -resistance requirements.
C. Mechanical Anchors shall be the type and size shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the
insulation manufacturer for the type of application shown and condition of substrate. —
BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION 07213 - 2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
k
k
A.
Installation procedures constitutes acceptance of the substrate.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to
be performed and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with
the insulation work until substrate is satisfactory.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case;
including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each application
indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult
the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with
r
the work.
f
C.
Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
r
around obstructions and fill voids with spray foam.
D.
Apply a single layer of insulation of the thickness indicated or the required thickness for the thermal
value indicated, unless otherwise shown or required to make up the total thickness.
E.
Apply insulation units of the type shown to the substrate by the method indicated. If not otherwise
indicated and except for units resting on horizontal surfaces, bond units to substrate with adhesive
or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
END OF SECTION
rBATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION 07213 - 3
s
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provide caulking in conjunction with interior painting operations and as otherwise indicated on
drawings for interior caulking.
B.
Provide sealant where indicated on the drawings in conjunction with weather seals, and as otherwise
noted.
C.
Perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, priming,
It
caulking and sealing indicated by the drawings and specified herein. Furnish all supplementary
items necessary.
r-
fD.
In fire rated partitions, install only fire resistant sealants.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System.
B.
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames.
C.
Section 09900 - Painting.
s
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications:
1. Minimum two year's experience in applying sealants and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer's Representative:
r'
1. Arrange for technical representative to be on project site to advise installer of proper
procedures and precautions for use of materials and to check installation.
r
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FS TT-S-00230C, Type II Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component.
B.
FS TT-S-001543A Sealing compound: Silicone Rubber Base.
t
C.
FS TT-S-00227E, Type 1, Class A Joint Sealant: Self Levelling.
r
1999 Gran Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1
D. ASTM C834 Standard Specification for latex sealing compounds.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1. Product Data: —
a. Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for
sealant, backing, and related materials.
2. Samples: —
a. Color charts for selection by architect.
b. Furnish samples of custom colors.
3. Certification:
a. Letter of certification from manufacturer or certified test laboratory report that —
materials are chemically compatible with each other and with substrate.
b. Letter from manufacture that certifies material's fire resistant qualities.
4. When requested by the architect, submit samples of cured sealants and a 6 inch long
sample of each type of joint backup.
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by the manufacturer. Store in a manner to
protect materials from the weather.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warrant, in writing, materials and workmanship against air and water leakage for a five-year _
period.
B. Provide written warranty of materials fire resistance and accepted use in at least a one hour fire
resistant assembly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Pecora Chemical corporation. —
B. Sonneborn Building Products.
C. W.R. Grace and Company. -`
D. General Electric Company.
E. Products Research and Chemical Corporation.
F. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Polysulfide (Type I): --
1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self -leveling) or Type 2
(nonsag) as recommended by manufacturer.
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2
r
E
r
B.
C.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2. Color: As selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. Synthacalk GC-5, Pecora Corp.
b. 350, PRC.
C. Sonolastic, Sonnebom-Contech, Inc.
Chlorosulfonated Polyurethane (Type 2)
1. One part conforming to FS TT-S-230C.
2. As selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. Synthacalk, Pecora..
Polyurethane (Type 3):
1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-0000227E, Class A, Type I or II.
2. Color: As selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. NR-200, Pecora.
b. No. 200, PRC.
C. Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, Sonneborn-Contech.
d. THC-900/901, Tremco.
Polyurethane (Type 4):
1. One -part conforming to FS TT-S-000230C, Class A, Type II.
2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. No. 6000, PRC.
b. NP 1, Sonneborn - Contech.
C. Dymonic, Tremco.
Silicone (Type 5):
1. One part rubber based silicone conforming to FS TT-S-001543, Class A, Type I.
2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. 790 Building Sealant, Dow Corning.
b. Silproof, General Electric.
C. Proglaze, Tremco.
Acrylic, Solvent Cure (Type 6):
1. One -part, FS TT-S-00230.
2. Acceptable products:
a. Unicrylic, Pecora.
b. Permacryl, Schnee -Moorhead Chemicals, Inc.
C. Mono, Tremco Manufacturing Company.
Nondrying, Nonskinning (Type 7):
1. One -part sealing compound.
2. Acceptable products:
a. GC-55, Noncuing, Goal Chemical.
b. BR-96, Pecora.
C. Curtain Wall Sealant, Tremco.
Bitumen Impregnated Sealant (Type 8):
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 3
1. Precompressed bitumen impregnated foam joint sealant.
2. Size: As recommended by manufacturer for joint condition as rain seal.
3. Acceptable product: Emseal compressed, Emseal Corporation.
I.
Backer Rod: Closed cell expanded polyurethane or polyethylene "Denver" foam, compatible with
sealant; sized and shaped to control depth of sealant; and to maintain 20% to 50% compression of
material.
J.
Joint Cleaners and Primers: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
K.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape.
L.
Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape.
M.
Sealant Tape:
1. Compressible adhesive -cohesive tape of cross -linked butyl polyisobutylene rubber that
accommodates variations and movement, sized as necessary to allow for joint movement
of + or - 25%.
2. Acceptable product: PTI 606, Protective Treatments, Inc.
N.
Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Closed cell polyethylene compatible with sealant.
2. Acceptable product: Sonoflex F, Sonnebom.
3. Fire resistant to be used in at least a one hour fire rating classification.
2.3 MIXING
A. Mix components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine all surfaces to receive sealant and report all conditions not acceptable. Installation shall
be deemed as acceptance of the surface.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean all surfaces and joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water
surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material, and previously applied paint or primer.
A. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant or caulk manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.
B. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil, or grease by solvent cleaning and
wipe surfaces. All surfaces must be clean and dry. Any protective coating on building materials
that will impair sealant bond shall be removed.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Sealants:
1. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life,
and application procedure.
2. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge.
Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed.
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4
.W
r, 3. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size or other appropriate
means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints.
4. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling
solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant.
B. Caulking:
1. Caulking: Apply caulking joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface.
Apply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely
fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and assure good
adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed.
C. Joint Size:
1. Sealant and Caulking: Depth equal to 1/3 times joint width or as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess caulking or sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work progresses.
B.
On non -porous surfaces excess uncured sealant shall be removed with a solvent moistened cloth
immediately. On porous surfaces excess sealant should be allowed to cure overnight, then removed
i
by lightly wirebrushing or sanding. All adjacent surfaces shall be clean and free from stains.
C.
Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site.
3.5 SCHEDULE
.M
A.
Interior and Exterior Joints Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type 1, 2, 4, or 5 at
Contractor's option and as recommended by manufacturer for joint condition and sealant color.
B.
Interior and Exterior Horizontal Joints Subject to foot and Vehicular Traffic: Type 2, self -leveling.
C.
Interior Horizontal and Vertical Joint Not Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type 6.
P
r
D.
In contact with roofmg and waterproofing materials: Type 3 or 4, low modulus, unmodified.
E.
Unexposed window joints: Type 7.
F.
Interior fire resistant rating of at least a one hour rated assembly subjected to minimal movement:
l
Type 2.
G.
Secondary seal and exterior brick expansion joint secondary seals: Type 8.
i
END OF SECTION
�. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5
t
SECTION 08100
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Custom fabricated rated and non -rated steel frames.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 08213 - Plastic Faced Wood Doors.
B.
Section 08700 - Finish Hardware
C.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
D.
Section 09900 - Painting.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon, Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
B.
ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc Coated.
C.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
D.
NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
E.
SDI - 100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of SDI - 100.
B.
Fire rated frame construction to conform to NFPA 252.
C.
Installed door and frame assembly to conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated on
drawings.
1.6
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
1999 Green Harvey Architects. Ire.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08100 - 1
B.
Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings, anchor types, and location of cutouts for hardware
and reinforcement.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Protect frames with resilient packaging.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Republic Builders Products Corp./ Subs. Republic Steel
B.
Ceco Corporation
C.
Tex -Steel Corporation
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
r
2.2
FRAMES
A.
Material: ASTM A569, hot rolled carbon steel.
B.
Frame Gage: 16 gage for interior frames, 14 gage for exterior frames.
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: SDI - 107.
D.
Dimensions: 1 inch return by required wall thickness; all frames are to match the existing frame
design within the building. -
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Jamb Anchors: 'Z' type for metal studs, 'T' type for masonry.
B.
Silencers: As specified in Section 08700. Exterior door frames are not to have silencers.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate frames and assemble as a complete welded unit. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, --
dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. No joint shall be obvious between head and jambs.
B.
Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Comply with ANSI A115
"Specifications for Door and Frame preparation for Hardware".
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08100 2 ""
C. Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single interior doors on strike side.
Exterior frames are not to have silencers.
D. Fabricate jamb anchors to be set in metal stud partitions from minimum 16 gage cold rolled steel
complying with ASTM A526.
E. Shop paint surfaces of doors and frame units, including galvanized surfaces, using manufacturer's
standard baked -on rust -inhibitive primer.
F. Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware cutouts
where installed in concrete, masonry or plaster opening.
2.5 FINISH
A. Primer: Baked on.
B. Paint: As specified in Section 09900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames in accordance with SDI - 100.
B. Coordinate with gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor placement.
C. Install minimum of 4 anchors per jamb for frames set in metal stud framing.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, comer to comer.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply
touch-up paint of compatible air -drying primer.
END OF SECTION
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08100 - 3
r-
i
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies new standard flush wood doors, and new flush wood fire rated doors. New
doors are to match existing doors for which they replace in appearance and function.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
C. Section 08705 - Door Hardware.
D. Section 08800 - Glazing.
E. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.4 IDENTIFICATION MARK
A. The top edge of each door shall bear an identification mark, either a stamp, brand or other indelible
mark, giving the manufacturer's name, the door's trade name, the construction of the door, code
date of manufacture and the quality.
B. The identification mark shall be accompanied by either of the following additional requirements:
1. An identification mark or a separate certification including the name of the inspection
organization, identification of the standards for the door, including glue type, identification
of preservative treatment for stile and rail doors, identification of veneer and quality
certification.
2. The National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association "Hallmark" edge stamp and glue
bond mark plug.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.
A. Samples:
1. Comer section of flush veneered door 12 inches square, showing details of construction,
labeled to show grade and type number and conformance to the specified standards.
C 1999 Green Harvey Architects, Inc,
T" Unauthorized duplication Prohibited. FLUSH WOOD DOORS
e
r
08211 - 1
2. Veneer sample 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch by 1/4 inch showing the specified wood specie sanded
to receive a transparent finish. Where the prefinish option is accepted, veneer sample shall
be factory finished.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show every door on the project and schedule its location in the building.
2. Indicate type, grade, finish and size; include detail of glazing, and other pertinent details.
3. Provide information concerning any specified requirements not included in the
manufacturer's literature and data submittal.
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Labeled fire rated doors showing conformance with NFPA 80.
D. Laboratory Test Reports:
1. Direct screw withdrawal test report in accordance with ASTM D1037.
2. Split resistance test report in accordance with NWWDA document "Test Method to
Determine Split Resistance of Hinge Edges of Composite Type Fire Doors".
3. Cycle/Slam test report in accordance with ANSI/SDI A151.1, Article 1.5.
1.6 SEALING
A. Give top and bottom edges of doors two shop coats of exterior spar varnish, or water resistant sealer
before sealing in shipping containers.
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Factory seal doors and accessories in heavy polyethylene bags or cardboard packages which shall
remain unbroken during delivery and storage.
B. Doors shall be stored flat, uniformly supported and stored under cover, in dry and well ventilated
areas, off the floor, at temperatures between 40 and 100 degrees F, and at relative humidity between
30 and 60 percent.
1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referenced in text by the basic designation only.
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
Steel Door Institute (ANSI/SDI):
ANSI/SDI A151.1-1980 ... Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 1037-78 ............ Evaluating the Properties of Wood -Base Fiber and Particle Panel
Materials
R
C. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program,
Fourth Edition 1985
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2
1.9
PART 2
2.1
2.2
No. 80 (1983) .. ,....... Fire Doors and Windows
E. National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA):
I.S.1-80 ............. Series for Wood Flush Doors (With I.S.1.3 Hollow Core Wood
Doors Deleted)
I.S. 4-70 ............. Water Repellent Preservative Treatment For Millwork
ANSI/NWWDA I.S.5-73 .. Ponderosa Pine Doors
(Not Numbered) .. ... Test Method to Determine the Split Resistance of Hinge Edges of
Composite Type Fire Doors
WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term:
1. Interior Doors: Two years.
B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
C. Provide a written warranty letter per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that installed
door components comply with TAS and/or ADA.
PRODUCTS
FLUSH DOORS, GENERAL
A. Flush doors shall be solid core wood flush doors meeting requirements of NWWDA I.S.1 Series
for Wood Flush Doors, Type II bond for interior doors, with solid wood or solid mat -formed wood
particleboard core. Staved core doors are not allowed.
B. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inches thick, unless otherwise shown or specified.
C. Guarantee: Flush doors are subject to terms of Article titled "GUARANTY" of Section
GENERAL CONDITIONS, and shall include the following:
1. Permissible warp tolerance not exceeding 1/4-inch as specified in NWWDA I.S.1.1.
2. No delamination.
3. For, interior doors, manufacturer's warranty for the life of the original installation.
D. All new doors shall have 3/4 hour, "C" label certification.
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Face Veneer: Veneers for door faces shall be in accordance with NWWDA I.S.1.1. Face veneer
of new and existing are to match, contractor shall verify existing species before placing order. Face
veneer, required to have transparent finish shall be good grade, rotary cut, light birch (match
existing), and shall be one species throughout the project unless scheduled or otherwise shown.
Face veneers, required to have painted finish shall be either rotary cut, sound grade, mill option
close grained hardwood, or medium density overlay. Lauan is not acceptable.
1. Doors to receive transparent finish shall be factory sanded. Final sanding of faces and stiles
shall be clean and smoothly sanded prior to finishing. The grade of sandpaper will depend
on the wood specie of the veneer.
2. Doors required to have transparent finish on one side and paint finish on other side shall
have veneers as required for transparent finish on both sides.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3
3. Match face veneers for doors required to have transparent finish for uniform effect of color
and grain at all joints.
4. Wood species and grade of face veneers shall match adjacent existing doors.
B. Solid Wood: Wood for stops, muntins, and moldings of flush doors required to have transparent
finish shall be same species as face veneer. —
C. Glazing: Install glass panels in smoke barrier doors and standard doors in steel frames approved
for use in labeled doors.
2.3 PREFINISH, PREFIT OPTION
A. Flush doors may be factory machined to receive hardware, bevels, undercuts, cutouts, accessories,
and fitting for frame.
B. Factory fitting to conform to the specification for shop and field fitting, including factory application —
of sealer to edges and routings.
C. Flush doors'to receive transparent finish (in addition to being prefit) may be factory finished as
follows: AWI Section 1500 specification for System #3 Alkyd -Urea Conversion Varnish or System
#4 Vinyl. The coating shall be AWI premium, medium sheen, closed grain effect. Stain shall be
used when required to produce the finish that matches the existing door finish.
2.4 FLUSH DOORS, INTERIOR (Except Fire Rated Doors)
A. Flush doors for interior use shall meet requirements of NWWDA I.S.1, Type II bond.
B. Stiles and Rails:
1. Top and bottom rails for particleboard and stave core doors shall have minimum 1-1/8 inch
face width by full core thickness. --
2. Stiles for particleboard core doors shall have minimum 1-1/4 inch face width with outer ply
of same species of face veneer for doors to have transparent finish. Stiles shall have full
core thickness.
3. Stiles for doors required to have transparent finish shall have outer ply of species as face
veneer of doors.
4. Stiles and rails shall be bonded to the core to minimize telegraphing.
2.5 FLUSH DOORS, FIRE RATED
A. Fire rated wood doors shall comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 80 and NWWDA I.S.1, —
Type 11 bond, and shall carry an identifying label designating the fire performance rating from a
qualified testing and inspection agency for the class of door or opening shown. Labels shall be of
metal with raised or incised markings:
B. Doors designated to have "C" label shall have a fire performance rating of 314 hour.
C. Stiles of label fire doors utilizing standard mortise leaf hinges shall meet the following performance `-
criteria:
1. Split Resistance: Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 500 load pounds when
tested in accordance with NWWDA document "Test Method to Determine Split Resistance �.
of Hinge Edges of Composite Type Fire Doors".
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4
I
2. Direct Screw Withdrawal: Average of ten test samples shall be not less than 700 load
pounds when tested for direct screw withdrawal in accordance with ASTM D1037; using
a No. 12, 1-1/4 inch long, steel, fully threaded wood screw. Drill 5/32 inch pilot hole, use
1-1/2 inch opening around screw for bearing surface, and engage screw fully, except for last
1/8-inch. Do not use a steel plate to reinforce screw area.
3. Cycle/Slam: 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other visible signs of failure
when tested in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/SDI A151.1, Article 1.5 Swing
Test, modified for a wood door in a steel frame.
D. Additional Hardware Reinforcement: Provide fire rated doors with hardware reinforcement
blocking. Size of lock blocks shall be as required to secure the hardware specified. Top, bottom
and intermediate rail blocks shall measure five inches minimum by full core width. All
reinforcement blocking shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's labeling requirements and
shall not be mineral material similar to the core.
E. Other Core Components: All other core components shall be manufacturer's standards as allowed
by the labeling requirements.
F. Provide steel frame approved for use in labeled doors for vision panels.
G. Inactive leaf of pairs of fire rated doors shall have a steel astragal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DOOR PREPARATION
A. Field, shop or factory preparation shall not violate the qualified testing and inspection agency label
requirements for fire rated doors.
B. Clearances Between Doors and Frames and Floors:
1. Doors shall have a maximum 1/8-inch clearance at the jambs, heads, and meeting stiles, and
a 3/4-inch clearance at the bottom, except as otherwise specified.
2. Maximum clearance at bottom of sound rated doors, light -proofed doors, doors to operating
rooms, and doors designated to be fitted with mechanical seals, shall be 3/8-inch.
C. Provide cutouts for glass, and special details required and specified.
D. Rout doors for hardware using the templates and.the location heights specified in Section 08705,
BUILDERS' HARDWARE.
• E. Fit doors to frame bevel lock edge of doors 1/8-inch for each two inches of door thickness.
F. Immediately after fitting and cutting of doors for hardware, seal edges of doors to be painted with
two coats of spar varnish and doors to receive transparent finish with two coats of water resistant
sealer. Finish all surfaces, including both faces, top and bottom and edges of the doors smooth to
the touch.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND APPLICATION OF HARDWARE
A. Install doors and hardware as specified in Section 08705.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5
3.3 DOOR PROTECTION
A. As each door installation is completed, place the polyethylene bag or cardboard shipping container —`
over the door and tape in place.
B. The protective covering shall encompass knobs and handles in addition to covering the door. _
Maintain the covering in good condition until removal is approved by the architect.
3.4 EXISTING DOORS
A. Once existing doors are no longer needed, store doors where directed by architect.
B. To minimize further damage all reasonable efforts shall be made to protect existing doors removed from the building.
C. All existing doors, hardware, and miscellaneous items removed from their current function and not _
required for the new door shall remain the property of the owner.
END OF SECTION
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
r'
SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
r
PART1
GENERAL
.•
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
r
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Complete hardware for new doors.
C,
B.
Butts and hinges, locks and latch sets, closers, push/pulls, trim units and silencers.
r'
C.
Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the
'
drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and
required for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically mentioned, but which
r"
is necessary for proper completion.of the work shown on the Drawings shall be provided without
additional cost to owner. Any omissions shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid
opening; otherwise the Drawings and Specifications will be considered complete.
t�
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
E:
p
B.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1
C.
Section 06400 - Architectural Millwork.
D.
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames.
E.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
1.4
REFERENCES
r
A.
ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act, 36 CFR.
r
B.
ANSIINFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
C.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute.
D.
BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
E.
DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
¢
F.
NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
r-
G.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
`
H.
SDI - Steel Door Institute
Gran Hovey Architects, Inc. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 1
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
G
I. ANSI A115.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. -
J. ANSI A115.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting.
K. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges.
L. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim.
M. A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers).
N. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim.
O. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinges.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this section with other sections involving manufacturer of any internal
reinforcement for door hardware.
B. Hardware subcontractor shall examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of
hardware quantities required. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled
hardware group, provide such door or item with hardware similar to that required for similar
conditions on the project. Locks, bolts, hinges, pulls, knobs shown on the plans for non -factory
manufactured cabinet and casework shall be included in the Division of Finish Hardware.
C. New hardware is to match the existing owner's standard, new shall match in every way.
Contractor shall confirm what is owner's standard prior to ordering material.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three year's
experience.
B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial and institutional door hardware
with five year's documented experience.
C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods —
needed for proper performance of the work of the section.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101. --
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01300. Resubmittals
will be required until complete architectural approval is obtained.
B. Indicate location and mounting heights of each type of hardware. Show required mortising and
internal reinforcing of metal products.
C. Provide product data on specified hardware. --
FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 2
D.
Submit keying diagrams to show grandmaster, master, etc. level of hierarchy.
r
6
E.
Submit proposed replacement levers, finish, function, and example.
t`
1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
t
A.
Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
TB.
Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to
preventative maintenance.
C.
Lost or stolen hardware shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Replace all items lost or stolen
with identical items.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match
hardware schedule.
B. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and .storing in secure area.
1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written warranty per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that installed door
components comply with TAS and/or ADA.
r
B. Provide warranties for all hardware furnished under this division to the general contractor for
transmittal to the architect. Warranties shall be for a period of one (1) year (five [5] years for
closer) from date of owner acceptance, against defects in material and workmanship of the
merchandise.
r
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The following acceptable manufacturers may not be the same manufacturers as found in the
building. The existing manufacturer shall supercede these specifications, match existing.
r B. Locksets and Latches: Sargent.
C. Hinges: Stanley; McKinney; Hager.
D. Closers: Sargent; LCN.
E. Exit Devices: Sargent.
I F. Kickplates, stops, and silencers: Trimco; Ives; Triangle Brass; Quality Hardware.
G. Smoke seals: Pemko; National Guard Products, Inc.
FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 3
is
H.
Thresholds: Pemko; National Guard Products, Inc.
I.
Cover Plates: National Guard Products, Inc.
J.
Push/Pulls: Rockwood, Trimco.
2.2
STYLE
A.
All hardware components shall match throughout the facility in finish, style, and function.
B.
Style to be Sargent 8100 series, heavy duty, with Sargent LNH lever. ~
C.
Provide a knurled grip or similar, acceptable texture on levers of doors leading to a potentially
hazardous situation for a physically or visually challenged person; ie, mechanical rooms, stairs, etc.
2.3.
KEYING
A.
Door Locks:
1. Master keyed.
2. Grand master key system.
3. Coordinate key system with owner.
B.
Supply two keys for each lock.
C.
Coordinate new keying system with architect and owner.
2.4
FINISHES
AND STYLE
A.
Finishes are identified in the schedule at end of this section. If not identified, finish is to be
recommended. Submit for architect's approval.
B.
New items are to match in style and function as closely as possible. Lockset knobs, keying system,
cylinder pins, and finishes are to match. Submit for architect's approval.
2.5
EXIT DEVICES
A.
Sargent 1040 series, smooth mechanism case, designed for 1 3/4" thick hollow metal doors. _.
B.
Devices are intended for door openings without a mullion.
C.
Provide devices with concealed vertical rods.
2.6
PUSH,
PULLS
A.
Use the model listed in the hardware schedule as reference, match the existing Push and Pulls if
different than specified.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 4
r
G
3.2
3.3
r-
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
C. The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a representative of the
referenced organization to determine that the work of this Section has been performed in accordance
with the specified requirements.
D. In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply with the
specified requirements, immediately remove the non -complying items and immediately replace them
with items complying with the specified requirements, all at no additional cost to the Owner, and
reimburse the Owner for the cost of the inspection.
INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI,
NAAMM, AWI, ANSI/NFPA 80, BHMA and DHI.
B. The contractor shall install all finished hardware plump, square, true and in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, using the best practices as approved by architect. Hardware shall be
fitted and operated prior to painting, then removed and painting completed before final installation.
All hardware must be thoroughly cleaned, free from mars and blemishes and in perfect operating
condition when turned over to the owner. Damaged or malfunctioning hardware will not be
acceptable.
C. No extra costs will be allowed to facilitate proper installation of any hardware. The general
contractor shall be responsible for the proper fabrication of all materials and work to receive
hardware.
D. Finish hardware shall be furnished with all necessary screws, bolts, or,other fastenings of suitable
size use and long life and shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. These
fastenings shall be furnished where necessary with expansion shield, security bolts, toggle bolts or
other approved anchors according to the material to which it is applied and recommended by the
manufacturer. All hardware fastened to concrete shall be furnished with machine screws and lead
shields. Extension flushbolts shall be edge mounted in all cases. Wrought box strikes shall be
furnished where strikes are mortised into wood. Strikes shall have sufficiently extended lips where
required to protect trim from being marred by latch -bolts, but no more than necessary. Strikes for
pairs of doors shall have 1" lips to center. All backsets of locks and latches shall be 2-3/4" from
the door edge unless otherwise indicated.
E. Hardware for fire doors shall conform to the requirements for NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. In case
of conflict between the type of hardware specified in these specifications or the type required for
fire protection, materials of equal quality and design without additional cost to owner, required by
NFPA shall be furnished.
HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY PROVISIONS
A. Door Hardware: Handles, knobs, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible
doors shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor or ground surface and shall have
a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or
severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than
five lbf. Designs include lever -operated mechanisms, push -type mechanisms and U-shaped handles.
When sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides.
Doors to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms,
and to other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch
by a textured surface on the door handle, knob, pull or other operating hardware. This textured
surface maybe made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to he contact surface. Such
FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - S
textured surfaces shall'not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors other than those to —
hazardous areas.
B. Door Closer: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that —
from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to an open
position of approximately 12 degrees.
C. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply with
this paragraph. For hinges doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door
opener or 30 inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or
folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch.
1. Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 lbf. Slight increases in opening force shall be
allowed where 8.51bf is insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials.
2. Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding
five lbf.
3. Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force allowed by the governing
authority or applicable building code.
D. Thresholds: The height of any floor level change plus the height of any applied threshold at
doorway sills shall no exceed 1/2" and shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1" in 2".
E. Conform to latest adopted version of the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas Accessibility
Standards criteria for positioning, operating, and opening force requirements. In case of conflict
materials f equal quality and design required by ADA or TAS shall be provided.
3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Field verify all existing mouting heights prior to ordering material. New material shall match --
existing heights.
B. Locks, latches: Finish floor to C/L of knobs, 40-5/16"
C. Deadlocks: Finish floor to C/L of cylinder, 48"
D. Push/Pull Plates: Finish floor to C/L of plate, 46"
E. Flushbolts: C/L of bolt face to top (and bottom) edge of floor, 12"
F. Exit Devices: Per template and installation instructions; Rails shall not conflict with door lites,
mounting heights shall be adjusted to center exit rail on appropriate door rail.
G. Closer, O/H Holders: Per template and installation instructions.
H. Stops: To protect doors and hardware from contact with parts of the building or other conflicting
doors.
I. Butt Hinges:
1. Top anchor butt - per template instructions;
2. Top butt hinge, - top edge of butt leaf to rabbet, 5"
3. Bottom butt hinge - bottom edge of butt leaf to finish floor, 10"
4. Intermediate butt hinge —equal distant between top and bottom butts.
FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 6
3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE
A. Within thirty (30) days after Owner Acceptance of the Project, the subcontractor shall meet with
the Owner's maintenance foreman and thoroughly instruct him in the care and adjustment of all
movable hardware furnished under this division. Provide him with a Manufacturer's Parts List for
all locks, exits and closer, a Bound Care and Adjustment Manual, and an adjustment tool for each
type of adjustable hardware. Included shall be a copy of an approved Hardware Schedule.
3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HW-1
DOORS MARKED 1
EACH TO HAVE:
Provide double weather stripping system all around existing aluminum store front type doors. Clean and
rework all existing moving parts; including locks, hinges, panic devices. Replace any component not found
to be in working order.
HW-2
DOORS MARKED 4, 10, 37, 43, 18
EACH TO HAVE:
3pairs
HINGES
7
1 pair
TOP AND BOTTOM FLUSH BOLTS
`
1
LOCKSET
1 pair
DOOR STOPS, ONLY AT PERPENDICULAR ADJACENT WALL LOCATIONS
1 set
SILENCERS
t
2
KICKPLATES - 16" HIGH BY WIDTH LESS 2"
2
CLOSERS
2 sets
ADA APPROVED PULL/PUSH PLATES AND HANDLE
1 set
SMOKE GASKET
HW-3
DOORS MARKED 8, 38, 39, 40, 44, 55, 56, 74
EACH TO HAVE:
3 HINGES
1 LOCKSET
1 set SILENCERS
1 CLOSER
r
H
4
L
DOORS MARKED 13, 16, 69, 70 (BOTH ARE EXISTING DOORS)
EACH TO HAVE:
1 KICKPLATE - 16" HIGH BY WIDTH LESS 2"
PON 1 set ADA APPROVED PUSH/PULL HARDWARE
FINISH HARDWARE
08700 - 7
r
HW-5
DOORS MARKED 19
EACH TO HAVE-
3 pairs
HINGES
1 pair
TOP AND BOTTOM FLUSH BOLTS
1
LOCKSET
1 pair
DOOR STOPS, ONLY AT PERPENDICULAR ADJACENT WALL LOCATIONS
1 set
SILENCERS
2
KICKPLATES - 16" HIGH BY WIDTH LESS 2"
2
CLOSERS
2 sets
ADA APPROVED PULL/PUSH PLATES AND HANDLE
1 set
SMOKE GASKET
2
PANIC EXIT DEVICES
HW-6
DOORS MARKED 71, 72, 73
EACH TO HAVE:
3
HINGES
1
PRIVACY LOCKSET
1
DOOR STOP
1 set
SILENCERS
1
KICKPLATE - 16" HIGH BY WIDTH LESS 2"
1
ADA APPROVED PUSH/PULL PLATES AND HANDLE
END OF SECTION
FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 8
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass and glazing for sections referencing this section for products and installation.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
B.
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames.
C.
Section 08213 - Plastic Faced Wood Doors.
D.
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.
E.
Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
B.
ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in
Buildings. '
C.
ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.
D.
ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
E.
FGMA - Glazing Manual.
F.
FGMA - Sealant Manual.
G.
FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type.
H.
FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release
Type
I.
FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compounds, Synthetic -Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically
Curing.
J.
FS TT-S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base.
1999 Gran Hovey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. GLAZING 08800 - 1
K. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Mental) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for
Channel or Stop Glazing).
L. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Glass and glazing materials of the section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and
air barrier:
1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900.
2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to
heel bead of glazing sealant.
B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of
glass as calculated in accordance with 1985 U.B.C. in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. —'
C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less. _
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product data on glass types specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental
characteristics, size limitations, special handling, or installation requirements.-
C. Product data on glazing compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. —
D. Samples:
1. Submit 2 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
2. Submit 12" x 12" piece of each glass indicated.
E. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate special precautions required.
F. Manufacturer's certificate: Certify that glass meets or exceeds specified requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and
Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings. -
B. Actual site measurements are the responsibiity of the contractor.
GLAZING 08800 - 2
1.10
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Section 01040.
work under provisions of
�•.
B.
Coordinate the work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to
adjacent work.
1.11
WARRANTY
.
L
A.
Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
7
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
h2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
PPG Industries, Inc.
B.
Ford Glass Division
C.
ASG Industries
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600
2.2
MATERIALS - GLASS
A.
Wire Glass - Clear
1. Type: Clear polished wire glass.
2. Thickness: 114 inch.
3. Conformance: Uniform Building Code Standard No. 43-4, ASTM 1036.
••
4. Acceptable Manufacturer: Equal to Pilkington diamond pattern.
f
2.3
GLAZING COMPOUNDS
r"
A.
Shall conform to ASTM C669 and as required by the glazing manufacturer.
B.
Butyl Sealant (Type GC-B): FS TT-S-001657; Shore A hardness of 10-20 black color; non -
skinning.
C.
Acrylic Sealant (Type GC-C): FS TT-S-00230, Type II, Class A; single component; cured Shore
r..
A hardness of 15-25; color as selected.
i
D.
Polysulphide Sealant (Type GC-D): FS TT-S-00227, Glass A Type II; two component; cured Shore
A hardness of 15-25; color as selected.
r
E.
Polyurethane Sealant (Tope GC-E): FS TT -S-00230, Type II -non -sag, Class A; as recommended
by the manufacturer.
n
r
F.
Silicone Sealant (Type GC-F): FS TT-S-01543, Class A; single component; chemical solvent
curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25
p
color as selected.
GLAZING 08800 - 3
r
i
2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square
foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing
rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x
one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. —
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore
A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;
color: black.
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS —
A. Provide testing and analysis reports of glass under provisions of Section 01400.
PART 3 EXECUTION —
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01040.
B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to
receive glazing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. _
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D. Remove all evidence of existing putty glazing from existing steel frames scheduled to be reglazed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with referenced FGMA standards and instructions of manufacturers of glass,
glazing sealants, and gaskets, to achieve airtight and watertight performance, and to minimize
breakage.
B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation
and discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance.
C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.
GLAZING 08800 - 4
1A CLEANING
A.
Clean under Section 01700.
work provisions of
B.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
C.
Remove labels after work is complete.
D.
Clean glass.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01500.
r..
B.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
C.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
D.
If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
E.
Remove and replace glass which is broker, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways
during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
a
END OF SECTION
r
C
r
f
i
r
3
L.
,
GLAZING 08800 - 5
I""
SECTION 09260
�^ GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Metal stud wall and wall furring.
B.
Metal channel ceiling framing.
C.
Gypsum board.
D.
Taped and sanded joint treatment.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for support of toilet accessories.
B.
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames.
C.
Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling Furrdown Construction.
D.
Section 09900 - Painting: surface finish.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
B.
ANSI/ASTM C79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board.
C.
ANSI/ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
D.
ANSI/ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
E.
ANSI/ASTM C646 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Sheet Material to Light
Gage Steel Studs.
F.
ANSI/ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum
Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board.
G. ANSI/ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 1
H.
GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.
I.
GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. _
1.5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Fire Rating Wall Requirements: 1 hour in accordance with UL 1988 listed assembly No. tJ465.
B.
Fire Rating Sub -ceiling Requirements: 1 hour in accordance with UL 1988 listed assembly No.
G501.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with three years' documented
experience.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS _
A.
Conform to applicable codes for fire rated assemblies.
1. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL.
2. Fire Rated Ceilings: Listed assembly by UL.
1.8
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape decorative finish, and accessories.
B.
Submit two samples of predecorated gypsum board 12 x 12 inch in size, one illustrating a sand --
texture finish and one illustrating an orange peal texture. Selection will be made by the architect.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
United States Gypsum Co. - Gypsum Panels
B.
Dietrich - metal stud system.
C.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
_
1. Gold Bond Products, Inc.
2. Redman Industries Inc.
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2
FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Interior Framing
1. Studs and Tracks: ANSI/ASTM C645; galvanized sheer steel, 3 5/8" by 25 gage thick,
'C' shape.
2. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645; 3 5/8" by 25 gage. _
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 2
i B. Exterior Framing:
1. Studs and Tracks: ANSI/ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 6" by 20 gage thick, 'C'
shape.
2. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645; 6" by 20 gage.
C. Fasteners: ANSI/ASTM C1002
D. Adhesive: ANSI/ASTM C557 and as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
e,
A. Standard Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length, ends
square cut, tapered edges.
B. Gypsum Board for Backup: ANSI/ASTM C36; 3/8 inch thick, ends square cut, tapered edges.
C. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick,
maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
D. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ANSI/ASTM C36; 1/2 inch minimum thickness, edges 'V' cut for
resisting water infiltration, ends square cut, 24 inch width by maximum permissible length.
rE. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Comer Beads: Metal equal to Dur-A-Bead, 103 by United States Gypsum.
B. Edge Trim: Metal equal to No. 200-A by United States Gypsum.
r
C. Control Joints: Metal equal to' No. 093 by United States Gypsum.
.. D. Joint Materials: ANSI/ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and
fasteners.
E. Comer Guards: Institutional Products Corp., 150/160 series, 2" wide, 48" high, high impact,
screw mounted. Locations shown on drawings. Submit colors for selection.
F. Grounds: Concealed 9 gage sheet metal or fire treated 2x wood.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by
the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 3
3.2 METAL STUD INSTALLATION
A. Install studding in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C754.
B. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center.
C. Partition Heights: To minimum 6 inches above suspended ceilings, or as noted on drawings. Install —
additional bracing for partitions extending above ceiling. Allowable deflection of L/240.
D. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side —
of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs.
E. Blocking: Nail wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet
partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. —
F. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work placed in or
behind partition framing. —
3.3 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Erect free-standing metal stud framing tight to masonry and plaster walls, attached by adjustable
furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
B. Erect furring studs vertically. Secure in place at maximum 16" on center. —'
C. Space furring studs maximum 16 inches on center.
D. Install thermal insulation batts between studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216.
B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. --
C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above -ceiling work.
D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring —
channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of
openings.
E. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
3.5 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION --
A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items with or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through —
partitions.
B. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:
1. Metal framing: two beads. —'
2. Face layer.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 4
E 3. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, ductwork, rough -in boxes, and all
other wall penetrations.
3.6 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216.
B. Erect single layer of gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring
over firm bearing.
C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm
bearing.
D. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm
bearing.
E. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.
F. Treat cut edges and holes in gypsum sheathing with sealant, or tape.
G. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as directed.
H. Place corner beads at external corners as indicated. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim
where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
I. Install concealed grounds in wall framing where shown or required, if not shown, for mounting of
surface hardware. Concealed grounds are not to be obvious when gypsum board system is finished.
3.7 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and comers to produce smooth surface ready to receive
finishes.
B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
C. Erect pre -decorated gypsum board vertically, with exposed batten fastening system.
D. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install No. 093 control joints in the interior face of gypsum board partitions opposite all exterior
expansion joints. Install control joints at other locations as directed.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 5
r SECTION 093 i i
CERAMIC TILE FINISH
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
r A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
r
A. The latest editions of the following specifications and references govern the work in this section and
constitute minimum requirements. Where specific requirements of this section are more stringent,
they shall supersede the corresponding requirements of these reference specifications.
1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) Standards:
�. a. A108.1-1985 Installation of Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile,
Quarry Tile and Paver Tile with Portland Cement
Mortar.
b. A108.4-1985 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water -Resistant
r Organic Adhesives.
L C. A108.5-1985 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland
Cement Mortar of Latex -Portland Cement Mortar.
r d. A118.1-1985 Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar.
e. A118.4-1985 Latex -Portland Cement Mortar.
f. A118.6-1985 Ceramic Tile Grouts.
g. A136.1-1985 Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
(R1972)
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
a. A 185-85 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain for Concrete
ro Reinforcement.
b. C 144-84 Aggregate for Masonry.
C. C 150-84 Portland Cement.
d. C 206-84 Finishing Hydrated Lime.
e. C 207-79, (R1984) Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
f. C 395-85 Chemical -Resistant Resin Mortars.
3. Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA):
r a. TCA 137.1 Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic
d Tile. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation
r 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic materials. The types
of work of this section include:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile.
2. Ceramic Cove Base, Molded Comers, Bullnoses.
3. Glazed Wall Tile.
CERAMIC TILE FINISH 09311 - 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tile Manufacturing Standard: TCA 137.1. Furnish tile complying with standard grade
requirements unless indicated otherwise.
B. Proprietary Materials: Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary setting and grouting materials in
compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting
materials.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range
of colors available, for each the specified. Include samples of grout and accessories requiring color
selection.
B. Furnish the manufacturer's signed Master Grade Certificates for each type of tile specified.
1.6 HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged materials and store in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. —
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Maintain' environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation in accordance with
referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS _
2.1 MATERIALS
A. New tile is to match finish and dimensions of existing tile, color will be selected by architect. -
Contractor to field verify existing tiles.
B. Tile Products:
1. Glazed Wall Tile: 4 1/4" x 4 1/4" cushion edge, gloss glaze of colors equivalent to
American -Olean Chart A-1.
2. Accent Stripes: Provide accent stripes as shown on the drawings of 4 1/4" square tile of
same construction as field tile. Color to be equivalent to color selected from American- —
Olean Chart A-1.
3. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile: Standard grade, not less than 1/4" thick with
cushion edges. Provide all necessary shapes and trimmers of similar tile. Pattern selection will be block random or medley random using 2", 2" x 1" and/or 1" x 1" the sizes. Color
and pattern selections will be equivalent to American -Olean Price Range B.
4. Trim and Special Shapes: Rounded external comers and trim shapes at head, jamb and
sills of openings, of same material and finish as field the and as follows:
a. Base: Sanitary cove units.
b. External Corners: Bullnose shapes, with a radius of not less than 3/4" unless
otherwise shown. C. Internal Comers: Field -butted square, except use square comer, combination
angle and stretcher type cap.
CERAMIC TILE FINISH 09311 - 2
7
C. Mortar and Grout:
1. Portland Cement Mortar and Grout: ANSI A 108.1.
a. Provide reinforcing wire fabric.
b. Color pigment: Mineral oxides, unaffected by lime, cement or weathering. Use
when required to produce selected grout color.
2.. Dry -Set Mortar. Factory -sanded pordand cement and additives; ANSI A 118.1. Use only
the type of dry -set mortar to set types of tile for which they are labeled.
3. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: Latex modified portland cement dry -set mortar; ANSI
118.4.
4.. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A 136.1; of proper type for intended use with respect to
moisture resistance, tile material and backing as certified by adhesive manufacturer.
a. Provide Primer -sealer where recommended by manufacturer.
5. Dry -Set Grout: Proprietary compound composed of portland cement and additives
formulated for the type of We installed. Color as selected by architect from manufacturer's
standard.
6. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: Proprietary compound composed of portland cement with
latex additive for a more flexible and less permeable grout. Color as selected by architect
from manufacturer's standard.
7. Provide product with latex additive which is compatible with latex additive in latex-
portland cement mortar.
D. Extra Materials:
1. Provide one unopened carton of each tile used on the project. Clearly identify on the
carton the tile type, color, size, building in which it was installed, and name and number
of room installed.
2. Deliver extra cartons to project site for verification. Owner will store cartons at their
preference.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Tile Installation Standards:
1. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following, except as
otherwise indicated.
a. ANSI A108.1: ANSI 108.4 or ANSI 108.5, as applicable.
2.. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for mixing and installation of proprietary
materials.
3. Extend tile work into recesses under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete
covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at
obstruction, edges and comers without disruption pattern or joint alignment.
4. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
B. Placement Methods:
1. Thin -set Installations: Dry -set portland cement mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or
organic adhesive, to suit substrate.
2. Submit for review and approval a water resistant adhesive for all floor tile installations.
Adhesive is to form a continuous waterproof coating under the floor tile and behind the
k base tile. Stop coating at the top of the base tile.
CERAMIC TILE FINISH 09311 - 3
7
C. Jointing Pattern:
1. Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor,
base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide
uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown.
2. Neatly place tiles uniformly spaced around floor drains, wall hydrants, or other finished _
items that do not include cover plates to conceal uneven edges or spacing.
D. Expansion and Control Joints:
1. Provide openings for joints where shown and to comply with details, or if not shown and
detailed, to comply with recommendations in TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation." Sealant work is specified in Section 07900.
2. All vertical wall intersections shall have a continuous bead of water and mildew resistant —
sealant from floor to ceiling. The sealant color shall match that of the grout.
E. Thresholds:
1. Use bullnose ceramic tiles of same color and material between door frames when
terminating ceramic tile.
2. Install sealant between bullnose ceramic tile and adjacent floor finish, except carpeting.
F. Grout:
1. 11.7.1 Use dry -set grout or latex-portland cement grout as recommended.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
B. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with
clean water before and after cleaning.
C. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, shipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise
defective tile work.
D. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to
completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering
during construction period to prevent damage and wear.
E. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least three days after grouting is
completed.
F. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
CERAMIC TILE FINISH 09311 - 4
SECTION 09511
_. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS -
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 GENERAL NOTES
A. This contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all acoustical ceiling work
as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. This contractor shall be responsible for the
furnishing .and installation of all accessories required for the completion of the work.
B. See reflected ceiling plan for locations of electrical and mechanical items related to the acoustical
ceilings. Cooperate with electrical and mechanical contractors to insure a first class appearance in
the completed work.
1.3 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout
1.4 COOPERATION
A. This contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling
installation to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this contract. Installation of file
shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been obtained to proceed. The contractor
shall give the architect advance notices for such operations.
B. The contractor shall inspect personally all surfaces to receive material and shall report to the
architect any defects or conditions which would affect his installation.
C. When crown molding is included in project, this contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the
carpentry contractor to see that a uniform border is maintained around the ceiling area.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. This contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from
defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance
of his work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the
warranty.
B. The following shall be judged as defective work: loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping,
cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of material.
1999 Gran Harvey Architan, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09511 - 1
1.6 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit to the architect for approval four sets of manufacturer's literature describing the ceiling
boards and suspension system proposed for the project.
PART PRODUCT _
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ceiling board shall be 24 x 48 x 5/8 inches square edged, random fissured mineral fiber with an
NRC of at least .50 to .60, STC of 35 to 39, Class A rating, and a white color coating.
1. USG Interiors, Inc. - OMNI
2. Amstrong World Industries, Inc. - MINABOARD —
B. Exposed suspension system shall be equal to DONN, Meridian ceiling, shall be white enameled
steel. Main beams shall be generally spaced at 48 inches on center except where light fixture
locations dictate a 24 inch spacing. Use 48 inch cross tees and 24 inch sub cross tees. Wall angle
shall be white enameled steel. Provide an intermediate -duty classification.
C. Existing ceiling tiles that are to be replaced due to damage shall match the existing size, texture,
color, and pattern as much as possible. The architect shall determine if new panels match the
existing panels; those found not to match shall be replaced.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXPOSED SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. The contractor shall employ workmen who are experienced in the erection of the types of ceilings
specified and shall maintain competent supervision of the work at all times.
B. Erect runner level and true to the elevation shown on the drawings. Start channels a minimum of
1 foot from walls, and space 4 feet on center thereafter. Where splices occur in channels, use
special splice bars as furnished with system specified.
C. Lay out ceiling work symmetrically in the various rooms with no less than one-half tile at the walls.
Cut tile accurately around electrical outlets.
D. Upon completion of the work, all tile shall be cleaned and left free form defects of any kind. With
the approval of the architect, small abrasions, etc., may be touched up with paint.
E. In general, lighting fixtures of fluorescent type shall be suspended directly on the runner bars.
Where fixture centers between two runner bars, both shall be main runner bars. See reflected
ceiling plans for fixture locations.
F. The use of wall angles to support more than 1 foot of suspended acoustical board ceilings will not
be permitted.
3.2 HANGERS
A. Hanger wires shall be #12 soft annealed wire. Hanger wires shall be plumb and taut in the
completed work. Slanting of hanger wires will not be permitted unless an equal and opposite hanger
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 2
r+
i
wire is installed to offset the thrust of the original wire hanger. This may be done only with the
expressed permission of the architect.
B.
Where hanger wires occur directly under ductwork or other overhead obstructions, provide a
trapeze of 1-1/2 inch channel iron. Install regular hanger wire at proper location along the length
of trapeze.
C.
The use of bridging angles spanning between bar joists is expressly forbidden for attachment of
hanger wires for supporting ceiling suspension systems.
D.
Hanger wires shall be attached to the bottom chords of bar joists or to special scissor clips attached
to steel subpurlins supporting the roof deck.
r
E.
Where acoustical board ceilings occur below concrete structural members provide power driven
studs with eyes into vertical face of concrete joists.
r'
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TILES
A.
Contractor shall only install ceiling tiles in which a building system is anchored to or through the
tile in order to complete the installation of the building system.
1. Once Phase I is complete and systems are operational, the contractor shall schedule with
the architect a pre -final building system walk through.
2. Do not install ceiling tiles that do not support a building system component, building
systems are to be visible.
B.
Phase II: After pre -final walk through and all corrective work is completed, install balance of
ceiling tiles.
1. Complete ceiling system is to be installed prior to final project walk through.
3.4 EXTRA TILE
A.
Upon completion of the work furnish to the owner one unopened carton of each type of acoustical
board installed in the project.
END OF SECTION
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 3
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Resilient sheet vinyl and vinyl composition tile flooring.
B.
Resilient base.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09680 - Carpet.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B.
FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing.
C.
FS SS-T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition.
D.
FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM
E84.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics,
sizes, patterns and colors.
B.
Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material
specified.
C.
Submit manufacturers samples of base material for their standard colors.
D.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 1
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature
stability.
B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and
24 hours after installation of materials.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 10 percent of the base and floor tile materials of each color selected under provisions of
Section 01700.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tile Flooring: Armstrong World Industries; GAF "Tarkett"
B. Base: Roppe Inc; Mercer Plastic Company, Inc.
C. Reducer Strips: Mercer Plastic Company, Inc.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Tile Flooring
1. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV, Composition 1; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8
inch thick; design as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Equal to
Armstrong World Industries Standard Excelon.
2. Provide Arstrong SR, Stepmaster, slip resistant tile in shower rooms where noted.
B. Base
1. Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I rubber; 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; top set coved. Color
selected by architect. Equal to Roppe.
C. Base Accessories
1. Premolded external and internal corners, of same material, height, thickness, and color as
base. There shall be no change in appearance between straight run base and premolds.
D. Accessories
1. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material.
2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
3. Reducer Strips and edge mouldings, equal to model #910 snap down moulding
manufactured by Mercer Plastics Company, Inc. Color as selected by architect.
4. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
RESILIENT FLOORING ' 09650 - 2
PART 3
EXECUTION
1
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and are
t
ready to receive work.
B:
Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative
alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
`
C.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
r
i
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with
subfloor filler.
B.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat hard surface.
PM
C.
Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
D.
Vacuum clean substrate.
r
3.3
INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL
"
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Mix vinyl tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent.
r
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D.
Set flooring in place and press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
r
E.
Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce minimum number of seams.
F.
Install tile with pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to produce basket weave pattern. Allow
minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.
If
G.
Install sheet flooring to eliminate seams.
H.
Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.
('
I.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.
J.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
3.4
INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
A.
Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 4
SECTION 09688
CARPET - GLUE DOWN
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Carpeting glue down method.
B.
Accessories.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Floor substrate surface, terminate edging of adjacent floor
finish and base finish.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy
Source.
B.
NFPA Class I, NFPA 258 (450 or less)
C.
ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D.
FS DDD-C-1559 - Carpet, Loop, Low Pile Height, High Density, Woven or Tufted with Attached
Cushioning.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
sizes, patterns, colors available, method of installation, codes and standards compliance, and
weight.
B.
Submit manufacturer's standard samples in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet
material specified.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning and shampooing.
B.
List of products allowed by manufacturer for cleaning and stain removal.
1999 Green Harvey Architects. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. CARPET -GLUE DOWN 09688 - 1
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in woven carpet with three years minimum experience.
B.
Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience. —
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable codes for carpet flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84.
B.
Conform to ANSI/ASTM E648. —
C.
Conform to NFPA-258, less than 450.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS —
A.
Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature
stability.
B.
Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature three days prior to, during
and 24 hours after installation of materials. _
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Lee's Commercial Carpet - Tenure, L3106
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01660.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Conforming to the following criteria:
Surface Texture Loop Pile —
Pile Height .143 inches
Stitches per Inch 7.8
Yarn Weight 28.0 oz/sq yd —
Color and Design As selected by the Architect/Owner
Warranty Wear - Lifetime of Carpet
Backing Unibond, woven polypropelene —
Face' Yarn DuPont Solution Dyed Nylon
Weave Construction Tufted
Static 3.0 KV - Standard Shuffle Test
Flame Spread NFPA Class I, less than 450 flaming mode —
B.
Equal to Lee's Commercial Carpet
2.3
ACCESSORIES —
A.
Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B.
Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer.
CARPET -GLUE DOWN 09688 - 2
F
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m) and are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative
alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
C.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with
sub -floor filler.
B.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface.
C.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D.
Vacuum floor surface.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Lay out rolls of carpet for approval.
C.
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
D.
Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and
unfrayed. Edge seam carpet at public entrance areas.
E.
Locate seams in area of least traffic.
F.
Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps.
G.
Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic.
H.
Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into
another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
I.
Cut and fit carpet around interruptions.
J.
Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
CARPET -GLUE DOWN 09688 - 3
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
CARPET -GLUE DOWN 09688 - 4
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Surface preparation.
B. Surface finish schedule.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
C. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames.
D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
SSPC - SPl - Solvent Cleaning
SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products
with five years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years
documented experience.
1999 Gran Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited PAINTING 09900 - 1
C. Flame Spread: Interior finishes must meet Class II flame spread, 26-75 index, or less.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
1.8
1.9
1.10
A. Provide product data on all finishing products.
B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
C. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each
surface fuushmg product scheduled, after color selection.
D. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
E. Certify that material installed on this project does not contain insecticide, mildewcide, and no more
than 0.06 percent lead.
FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide one field sample panel, 12 inches long by 12 inches wide, illustrating special texture, and
finish.
B. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labelled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
D. Container labelling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing
and reducing.
E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45° F and a maximum of 90° F, in well
ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and beating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures
above 55° F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 55° F for interiors; 65° F for exterior;
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
PAINTING 09900 - 2
D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65° F for interior or exterior, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Provide lighting level of 50 footcandles measured mid -height at substrate surface.
1.11
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Provide two gallon containers of each color and surface texture to owner.
B.
Label each container with color, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT
A.
Glidden Coatings and Resins Division of SCM Corporation.
B.
PPG Industries, Inc. Coatings and Resins Division.
C.
Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc.
D.
Sherwin Williams Company.
E.
Monarch Paint Company.
F.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
B.
Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
C.
Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners, and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
2.3
FINISHES
A.
Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Report any condition that
may potentially affect proper application.
PAINTING 09900 - 3
1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, .measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
4. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in' accordance with ASTM D2016.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or
finishing.
B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.
F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat
of etching primer.
G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose
mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a
solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering
of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water.
Allow to completely and thoroughly dry.
H. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster.
Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
I. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of
scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply
a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned.
Spot prime paint after repairs.
J. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to
make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
Prime metal items including shop primed items.
K. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats.
L. Concrete Paving Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion
of finishing materials. M. Hollow Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
PAINTING 09900 - 4
r
f
3.3 PROTECTION
A.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration.
B.
Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this section. .
C.
Furnish drop cloths, shields and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring
other surfaces.
D.
Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.4 APPLICATION
i
A.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
r
C.
Apply each coat to uniform finish.
r..
D.
Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than proceeding coat unless otherwise approved.
E.
Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F.
Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set.
Wipe excess from surface.
H.
Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
rI.
Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss
varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
J.
Apply new paint as specified on new and renovated existing surfaces. The entire renovated surface
shall be painted, not just the repaired portion. Renovated surfaces shall be painted from floor to
ceiling, corner to comer, or break in surface plane.
K.
Repainting the entire surface (new, renovated, or existing): shall be required if the surface is
damaged by construction activities. The architect will make the final determination.
e
3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A.
Refer to Section 15 and Section 16 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of
equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit.
B.
Paint shop primed equipment.
C.
Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,
t
brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished.
D.
Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidently.
PAINTING 09900 - 5
3.6
3.7
3.8
E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat
black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, and grilles, to match face
panels.
F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before
installing equipment.
H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements
indicated. Color band and identify as required.
I. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
CLEANING
A. As work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,
surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers, and remove daily from site.
SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Steel Bollards; Steel Channel Frame for Canopy.
B. Grating & Floor Plates (Section 05530): Sidewalk Grate & Frame.
SCHEDULE OF PAINTING
A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those
listed below. The types of paint are identified with Pittsburg Paint or Sherwin Williams numbers.
B. The owner and architect shall select color, tint, and sheen from manufacturer's standard color chart.
C. Exterior and Interior Metal:
1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel
D. Interior Wood: For paint finish
1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel
E. Interior Wood: For transparent finish
1. First Coat: Rez 77 line semi -transparent stain
2. Second Coat: PPG Speedhide 6-10 sanding sealer
3.- Third Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer
4. Fourth Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer
PAINTING 09900 - 6
F
G
H.
I.
J
Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings
1. First Coat: PPG 6-2 Speedhide drywall sealer
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex enamel
Galvanized Metal
1. First Coat: PPG 6-209 galvanized steel primer
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide enamel
Concrete and Asphalt Pavement
1. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, 1L Line yellow unless noted otherwise.
2. Second Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, accessible parking zones to recieve a
second coat.
Concrete Unit Masonry
1. First Coat: SW ProMar B25 Block Filler
2. Second Coat: SW A-100 Satin Latex A82
3. Third Coat: SW A-100 Satin Latex A82
Concrete Walks
1. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, blue unless noted otherwise. Accessible
ramps and sloped walks.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING 09900 - 7
SECTION 10100
MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Re -surfacing of existing chalk boards.
1.3 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish special concealed supports to Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry for installation in wall
construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
1.5. MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Included maintenance information on regular cleaning and stain removal.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning, crazing,
cracking or staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Walltalkers, RJF International Corp.; Kenmark, Inc., Mike Avey, Lubbock, 785-1366
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sheet: EZ-RITE, 50" wide, EZRA Product Code, matte white color, dry erase writing, adhesive
backing.
2.3 FRAME AND TRIM
A. Frame: Existing aluminum system to remain, do not damage.
B. Chalkrail: Extruded aluminum, profile; one piece, full length of markerboard; concealed fasteners.
1999 Gran Harvey Archimm, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
10100 - 1
PART 3 EXECUTION —
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking are ready to receive work, and opening dimensions
are as instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate construction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install chalk board re -surfacing material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Manufacturer's representative is to be at job site during installation. _
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover markerboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame.
C. Remove protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
C 1999 Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication Prohibited. MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS 10100 - 2
SECTION 10440
SIGNS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS J
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Interior wall mounted plastic signs.
B. Exterior business signs.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
B. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300,
B. Submit letter style and colors for selection.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide a minimum of one year.
B. Submit according to Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Gravoply.
B. Andco.
2.2 MATERIAL - PLASTIC SIGNS
A. Andco, Series 850 with radius comers.
B. Flexible blended acrylic extruded sheet.
C. Layers permanently bonded together, two colored layers.
D. Satin finish.
SIGNS 10440 - 1
E.
Colors to be selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
F.
Letter style from manufacturer's standard styles or Helvetica Medium..
G.
Foam tape mounting to wall. —
2.3
MATERIAL - EXTERIOR BUSINESS SIGNS
A.
Building Wall signs: Brown, 12" high metal letters, matching Reese Center standard lettering.
B.
Text: *LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY"
C.
Signs are to be mounted to face of building as noted.
2.4
FABRICATION - PLASTIC SIGNS
A.
Two inch high sign by required length to provide uniform margin.
B.
Corner to be radius with square edges.
C.
Handicap emblem to be square with radius comers.
D.
Text and emblems to be raised from background, also provide text in braille message format.
2.5
FABRICATION - EXTERIOR BUSINESS SIGNS
A.
These signs are to match existing Reese Center standards.
PART 3
EXECUTION —
3.1
MOUNTING
- PLASTIC SIGNS
A.
Signs are to be set level to the floor.
B.
Edge of signs 6 inches from strike side of door frames, mounted to wall.
C.
Bottom of sign to be 60 inches above floor in compliance with Texas Accessibility Standards, 4.30.
3.2
MOUNTING - EXTERIOR SIGNS —
A.
All signs shall be securely anchored to resist damage during high winds.
B.
All items are to be securely mounted in a concealed design.
C.
Locate signs where shown on drawings or directed by the architect.
D.
Provide mounting information along with product data submittals.
3.3
CLEANING
A.
Clean signs and adjacent surfaces of any adhesive residue, mastic, concrete, mortar, etc.
SIGNS 10440 - 2
B. Protect signs from damage until substantial completion is accomplished and accepted by the
Architect.
C.
Remove all protective covers, wrappings, or tape prior to substantial completion.
3.4 SCHEDULE - PLASTIC SIGNS
A.
Women +HC emblem + braille
Room 112, Door 13
B.
Men + HC emblem + braille
Room 111, Door 16
C.
Toilet + HC emblem + braille
Room 169, Door 71
D.
Shower + HC emblem + braille
Room 170, Door 72
E.
Shower + braille
Room 171, Door 73
F.
Toilet + HC emblem + braille
Room 165, Door 69
END OF SECTION
SIGNS 10440 - 3
r
6
SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary. General Conditions apply to.the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet accessories.
B. Attachment hardware.
1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Installation of backing plate reinforcement.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: In wall framing and plate for support of accessories.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Al17.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by
Physically Handicapped People.
B. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,
Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates Bars and Strips.
C. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
D. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
E. ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel
Plus Chromium.
F. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
G. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
H. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
0 1999 Green Harvey Architects. Inc.
t Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10800 - 1
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI A117.1. —
B.
Comply with the latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) and Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.8
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate the work of this section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and "-
reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories
B.
The Bobrick Company
C.
Bradley Corporation
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. ..
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366. r
B.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.'
C.
Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
D.
Adhesive: Contact type, waterproof. _
E.
Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized tamperproof.
F.
Expansion Shields: , Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for —
component and substrate.
G.
Wall Grounds: Provide concealed grounds of 9 gage metal plates or fire resistant 2x wood blocking. —
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. r
B.
Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
C.
Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
D.
Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. _
E.
Shop assemble components and packagecomplete with anchors and fittings.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2
F.
Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.'
G.
Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
H.
Concealed grounds shall be at least 9 gage metal or 2 x 6 wood.
2.4
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
B.
Stainless Steel: 18 gauge type 304 satin finish.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions as instructed by the
manufacturer.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C.
Concealed grounds are to be securely anchored to partition framing.
D.
Installed grab bars must be able to support a steady force of 250 pounds.
3.4
ACCESSORY LOCATIONS
A.
In toilet rooms where only one sink is provided, provide a non -tilted mirror. In toilet rooms where
more than one sink is provided, provide one tilted mirror above the accessible sink and one non -
tilted minor above each of the none accessible sinks.
B.
Comply with the latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards, Chapter 4, location
and mounting heights criteria.
3.5
TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
Robrick
A.
Grab Bars B-6206.99 x 36 x 42
2561 Series Anchor Plate
B.
Mirrors B-290 20 x 44, 84 x 44
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10800 - 3
C.
Toilet Tissue Dispensers
B-686
D.
Soap Dispenser
B-155
E.
Paper Towel Dispensers
B-369 (recessed)
B-262 (surface)
F.
Robe Hooks
B-6717
G.
Shower/Dressing Seat
B-518 or B-517
H.
Shower Curtain
B-204 and 204-1
I.
Shower Curtain Rod
B-6047
END OF SECTION
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4
r
SECTION 12510
MINI BLINDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mini blinds and operating hardware.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal narrow window blinds, manual control wand, installed at each exterior window opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating colors available.
B. Samples: Submit samples, 6 inch long illustrating blind materials and finish, color, cord type and
color.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL BLIND
A. Sheeting: Plastic of integral solid color, one wide slats. Length of slats to extend to within 1/4 inch
of the width of window frame. Closed blinds shall fully cover glazed opening.
B. Roller Mechanism: Internally fitted with hardware for blind operation, slats rotate via nylon cords.
C. Controller: Clear plastic wand.
D. Attachment Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.
E. Valance: Matching blinds.
2.2 FINISHES
A. Blind Slat and Head Rail: Plastic of integral solid color. Color to be selected from standard color
chart.
B. Valance: Plastic of integral solid color. Color to match slats.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
1999 Green Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorved duplication prohibited.
MINI BLINDS
12510 - 1
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work.
B. Coordinate blind installation with other trades so as not to install blinds prior to ALL finish work;
drywall floating, sealants and caulkings, trims, window frame and hardware, and painting.
C. Beginning blind installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners.
C. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
D. Protect installed blinds from damage until Substantial Completion has been reached.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove all protective covers prior to Final acceptance of work.
B. Completely dust all blinds, remove all dirt and stains.
C. Replace damaged or permanently stained blinds with new blinds matching installed blinds.
END OF SECTION
MINI BLINDS 12510 - 2
r
SECTION 15010
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials and
labor as required for the installation of a plumbing system and heating and air conditioning system,
all as shown on the drawings, as herein specified, or both.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations of the General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and General Requirements for work required under this section.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
k
B. This Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all submittal data covering proposed equipment to the
Architect for approval prior to installation. All equipment shall be submitted at one time in a bound
folder with an index of submittal.
1.4 REGULATIONS
A. All work shall be done in strict accordanceand compliance with State and Local Laws, together with
regulations of the particular Utility Companies concerned.
B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities.
�. 1.5 DRAWINGS
i
A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Each Contractor shall check these
drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or
I omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor
with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of
sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relievethe Contractor of his duty to provide all work
r— required by the complete Contract.
I
a
B. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the
�., extent of the work contemplated. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be
determined after equipment has been approved by the Architect and as directed by the Architect.
All materials or labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor without additional charge as if called for in these
specifications or shown on the plans.
C. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions,
�• supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items
with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary because of failure
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-1
r
a
to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the
Contractor's) own expense.
D. This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all conditions to insure that the work
as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No material shall be fabricated
or delivered to the job until these conditions have been determined.
E. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during construction, if
required, and no allowances will be made for prefabricated material or on job materials which can
not be used due to actual conditions.
1.6 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these specifications, it has been done, in most cases,
in order to establish a standard. Where the phrase "or equal", or its equivalent is used in connection
with a particular item of material or equipment, the products of others than the particular
manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable,if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution
must be of quality as good as, or better than, the named article. Where the phrase "or equal" or its
equivalent, is not used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment only the
products of the manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable.
B. If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specifiedby name, he shall
be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred because
of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel piping requirements
resulting from such substitution shall be borne by the Contractor substituting other equipment.
C. Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the following sections, the Contractor
shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes
to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item
and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submission shall be
accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings,
necessary to give full and complete details for the completed installation.
D. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or interior quality, must be replaced _
by an acceptable item within two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such
rejection. If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves
the right to notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish.
Six (6) copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and
firmly bound brochures for approval.
1.7 PRECEDENCE
A The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the
following sequence:
1. Soil and waste piping
2. Duct work
3. Cold and hot water piping
4. Electric wiring
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-2
r..
!~ 1.8 COOPERATION
A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other contractors to properly
coordinate their work, to avoid interference and delays, and arrange all parts of the work so as to
harmonize in service and appearance with all other parts.
1.9 INTERFERENCES
A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must harmonize the work of the different
trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be
avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be
kept as close as possible to walls, ceiling, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of
space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish it must be furnished and installed by the
contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Exact locations of mechanical and electrical outlets orequipment ma be varied a reasonable amour y t
by the Architect before installation without additional cost to the Owner.
r
r
f
L
C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arranged that all parts will be available for proper
maintenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free
from any defects. Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have
established as standard, shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their
label.
B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be
responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptanceof
the job.
C. Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and
equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shallbe covered during
the day and at the end of each day.
D. Each Contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor
required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract.
E. The workmanship shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordance with
the best practice of the trade.
3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install
all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work.
B. All piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be supported at sufficient close intervals to keep its
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-3
alignment, prevent sagging and to prevent pipe from being supported by equipment or equipment
connections.
C. Vertical pipes shall be supported from floor with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and adequately
support their weight. Vertical copper tubing, 1-1/4 and smaller shall be supported at 3' intervals
and at the base of pipe risers, where required for proper support. Hangers shall be manufactured by
Kindorff, Unistrut, Elcen or equal. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported on
a continuous hanger. All hangers must meet the Architect's approval. Use of perforated straps will
not be permitted.
D. All horizontal pipes suspended with structure above shall be supported by hanger rods of the
following size:
1.
Pipes up to and including 2"
3/8"
rods
2.
2-1/2" and 3" pipe
1/2"
rods
3.
4" and 5" pipe
518"
rods
4.
6" pipe
3/4"
rods
E. Where pipes are supported from overhead concrete construction, the hanger rods shall be provided
as detailed on the plans.
F. Soil pipe shall be supported at all turns and at intervals not to exceed 5' on centers on straight runs.
The following table gives maximum hanger spacing for copper and steel lines but hangers shall be
more closely spaced where necessary:
SIZE OF LINE HANGER SPACING
3/4" and smaller
5'
1"
6'
1-1/4"
7'
1-1/2"
8'
2" to 4"
10'
Larger than 4"
12'
G. If pipes of different Contractors can be racked on the same supporting structure, each Contractor
shall cooperate with the other involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish
a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation.
3.2 FIRE PARTITIONS
A. Any penetrations through a fire wall or floor shall have the ancillar space sealed with a fire retardant
material such as Link -Seal or equal. Fire and smoke dampers shall be installed where required or
as shown on the drawings.
3.3 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPES
A. Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, or long offsets, shall be provided wherever shown on the
drawings, and where necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken
pipes or fittings due to rigid connection shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Anchors shall be installed where shown or required to control expansion of piping system Anchors
shall be of the clamp type securely fastened to the building structure.
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-4
r
r 3.4 UNIONS
A Unions shall not be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of
the building unless shown on drawings or specified. Unions shall be installed on both sides of all
L ! valves, regulators, check valves, traps, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected.
Where copper pipe joins iron or steel pipe, an insulation union using a "Bakelite" insulator shall be
used.
3.5 ESCUTCHEONS
rA Where exposed to view, pipes insulated or bare, passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, shall be
filled with near, heavy spun or stamped steel escutcheons, firmly secured to the pipes. Escutcheons
shall be of sufficient outside diameter to surround both the pipe and the sleeves. The sleeve shall
have a nickel plated finish, fabricated in one piece and shall be firmly anchored in space. "Snap -on"
type escutcheons will not be permitted.
r
3.6 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A Utility connection locations, depths, sizes, characteristics and capacities shall be verified by each
Contractor utilizing these items and any discrepancies from those shown on the plans shall be
brought to theArchitect's attention before bidding. Any and all utility connections shall be made
by the Contractor, as required, with no increase to the Owner above the price indicated in the
Contractor's proposal.
3.7 PAINTING
A No painting will be required under this section.
3.8 TESTING
A This contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under "Testing" section of
these specifications.
3.9 ELECTRICAL
A Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase and voltage as specified and shall be of type
recommended by motor manufacturer for type of service involved.
B. The Contractor furnishing the motor shall install it. The Contractor" furnish such motor controls
and starting equipment as specified or as required. The erection and connection of all switches,
starting and control equipment, and the wiring of same, shall be done as required. Conduits from
controllers to motors shallbe flexible for not over three feet (3') and shall be attached to the terminal
housing of the motor. All flexible conduit to motor shall be waterproof type with neoprene jacket.
C. Where automatic controls are called for in the Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning
specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves,
thermostats, etc., shall be installedby the Contractor furnishing the controls, but all wiring necessary
shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. The Contractor furnishing the controls shall furnish a
control wiring diagram to the Electrical Contractor.
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-5
t
3.10 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Each contractorshall provide sleeves for service lines passing through walls, roof or floors, subject
to Architect's approval and/or as shown on the Drawings. Pipes passing through interior wall sleeves
shall be free to move through sleeve. Sleeves exposed to view shall be equipped with cast brass
escutcheons.
B. All sleeves installed in verticalposition shall be constructed of standard weight galvanized steel pipe.
All sleeves in horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel or extra heavy cast
iron pipe unless otherwise noted, welded to steel plate in vertical position as detailed on the
drawings. Pipe sleeve diameter shall be a minimum of 2 diameters larger than the outside of pipe
passing through same, and a minimum of 1" larger than pipe plus insulation. Insulation shall pass
thru sleeves.
C. Where pipe extends through exterior walls below grade, oversize pipe sleeves, 2 diameters larger,
made of standard weight steel pipe shall be used, and the annular space between service pipe and
sleeves shall be filled with picked oakum and cement, or lead where required, to make a waterproof _
joint.
D. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surfaces and/or as detailed on the Drawings. Copper
pipes passing through steel pipe sleeves shall be installed with rubber insulation between pipe and
sleeves. Isolator insulation shall be similar to Johns -Manville Aeratube.
E. Where any pipe passes through fire walls, smoke walls, and concrete slabs between floors, the
Contractor shall furnish and install fire seals, U.L. listed, type LS, link -seal, as manufactured by
Thunderline Corp., or approved equal. Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in steel pipe sleeve
of correct size for pipe and insulation.
3.11 INSULATING COUPLINGS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install insulating couplings whereverpiping material changes from
galvanized steel pipe to copper, or from black steel to copper, and where shown on the drawings.
3.12 INSULATION
A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under "Insulation" section of
these specifications.
3.13 EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS
A. This Contractor shall make final connections of waste, water, and ventilation systems to items
furnished by others. Furnish all traps, shutoff valves, wiring connections as required for a complete
system.
3.14 LABELS
A. This Contractor shall label all valves with permanent metal name tags, 1-1/2" diameterby 3/16" thick
brass name tags. Each tag shall describe fully the function of each valve by a stamped number on
each side of tag and legend mounted under glass in each Mechanical Room. Each tag shall be
applied to the handle of each valve with a hog ring and wrench.
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-6
i
( 3.15 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
j
A. All exposed pipes passing through floors, ceiling, or walls shall be provided with approved nickel
or chromium plated cast brass ceiling plates securely attached with set screws.
3.16 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
F
PW
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
3.17 INSTRUCTION MANUALS
A. Furnish four (4) complete bound copies of Instruction Manuals on all operating equipment to Owner.
Manuals: complete with repair instructions, replacement parts list, and complete operating
instructions and wiring diagrams.
3.18 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the Contractor shall run test over
a sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of apparatus, etc., and of
system as a whole to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. See Testing section of the
Specifications.
3.19 GUARANTEE
A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship and material against defects for a period of one (1)
year from the date of acceptance, unless specified otherwise in other sections of this specification.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010 7
7
r..
r
t
SECTION 15020
TESTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide specified testing and testing as required by governing authorities.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable, clauses and regulations for other requirements.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit a certificate signed by the job superintendent certifying that all tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. All testing required under the contract of the plumbing contractor or heating and ventilating and air
conditioning contractor shall be approved by the Engineer before acceptance. Provide the necessary
valves for cutting off existing work not to be tested.
B. The contractor shall perform the various tests as specified and as required by State and Local
Authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests.
C. Any leaks or defective material found shall be repaired and replaced, and tests shall be repeated until
no further leaks or defects are indicated.
D. Drainage System: The entire drainage, roof drainage, and venting system shall have all necessary
openings plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest vent
stack without showing a drop of greater than four inches (4"). Where a portion of the system is to
be tested, the test shall be conducted in the same manner as described for the entire system, except
that a vertical stack ten feet (101) above the highest horizontal line to be tested may be installed and
filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure, or a pump may be used to supply the required
pressure. The pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours.
E. All Domestic Hot and Cold Water System: Upon completion of any part of the roughing -in and
setting of fixtures, the entire hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic
pressure of not less than 100 lbs. per square inch gauge, stand proof tight at this pressure for not less
than eight (8) hours. Each particular part of the hot and cold water system shall be tested as above
specified.
TESTING 15020-1
I
F. All heating and air conditioning systems shall be tested for proper operation both in the heating
season and cooling season.
END OF SECTION
TESTING 15020-2 —
F
r SECTION 15060
L
PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This contract shall include the furnishing and installation of all labor and material necessary to
complete all plumbing and gas fitting as shown on the drawings and as herein speed.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING` GENERALLY
A. Type of piping for the various systems shall be as specified under specific headings.
B. Pipe ends shall be square cut. Ends of pipes shall be reamed and shall be wiped clean to remove
cuttings. Before installation, pipe shall be stood on end and rapped sharply to remove cuttings and
other foreign material from interior. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and outside.
C. Screwed joints shall be made with best linseed oil and graphite or "Jointite" used on male threads
only. Omit compound on two (2) end starting threads.
D. Pipe shall be accurately cut to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be permitted.
E. The various service pipes, valves, fittings, etc., running parallel with each other and near together
shall be in line with each other and shall be kept a sufficient distance from each other and other
work, to permit not less than 1/2" between finished coverings on the different services.
[ F. No unions are to be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of
the building unless so shown on drawings or specified. Unions must be installed on each side of all
.• special valves, regulators, etc., and one (1) side of all check valves, thermostatic traps, and at all
pieces of equipment such as pumps, condensers, tanks, etc., so that such equipment may be readily
disconnected.
G. Each Contractor shall furnish all foundations, structural or pipe supports indicated or called for
specifically, or that may be required to support his particular equipment and material, unless hangers
are definitely indicated as being furnished by others. All horizontal runs of piping shall be securely
rw supported by pipe hangers spaced not more than 10' apart, and closer when necessary to prevent
sagging. Soil pipe shall be supported every 5'.
PIPING 15060-1
a
H. Perforated strap hangers will not be allowed for any part of hangers.
I. Swing joints, offsets, and anchors shall be provided in piping where required to provide for and
control expansion or contraction of pipe.
J. All piping, except waste piping, shall be installed above finished first floor slab, unless otherwise
noted on the Drawings.
2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Locations for various kinds of pipe materials shall be in accordance with the schedule following:
1. Plastic DWV pipe and fittings:
a. Sanitary drainage piping unless designated otherwise.
b. Aboveground vent and drainage piping.
2. Type L hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings:
a. Aboveground domestic water piping within the building 4" and smaller in size.
b. Drainage pipe where shown on the drawings. —
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COPPER WATER PIPING
A. Pipe and tubing shall be cut accuratelyto measurements established at the building by the Contractor
and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall betaken not to weaken the
structural portions of the building. Piping aboveground shall be run parallel with the lines of the
building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Branches from service lines may be
taken off top of main, bottom of main, or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be
required by structural or installation conditions. Service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a
sufficient distance from other work and not less than 1/2" betweenfinished covering on the different
services. No water piping shall be buried in floors unless specifically indicated on the drawings or
approved. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of long screws and
bushing will not be permitted. Where contractor connects copper to galvanized steel piping or hot
water heaters, furnish and install insulating couplings.
B. Drains indicated on the drawings in connection with the water distribution system shall be 1/2" brass
plugs. Additional drains shall be installed at low points on the hot-water and cold-waterpiping, and
all piping shall grade down to the drains.
C. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction or tubing. Horizontal runs of
tubing over 50' in length shall be anchored to the wall or to the supporting construction about
midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends.
D. Air chambers shall be provided on both hot and cold supplies near each faucet or control valve, as
applicable, and where not definitely shown on the drawings shall consist of a 12" length of tubing of the same diameter as the branch supply, fitted with a cap.
PIPING 15060-2
i
4 .
E. Tubing shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing
shall be well cleaned with steel wool before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of
fittings and tubing when making connections. All joints shall be made with fittings. Joints for
aboveground soldered fittings shall be made with a non -corrosive paste flux and solid string silver
solder, and all underground joints shall be made with silfos only. Cored solder will not be permitted.
Threaded swing joints shall be provided on all branch connections to mains and risers to provide for
expansion and contraction of tubing. 95-5 solder shall be used to make joints extending to fixture
only.
3.2 SANITARY PIPING
A Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall be given a grade of 1/4" per foot where possible, but in no case
less than 1/8" per foot. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and
above the roof lines as vents, except where otherwise specifically indicated. Where practicable, two
or more vent pipes shall be connected together' and extended as one pipe through the roof. Vent
pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close a possible to the under side of the roof, with horizontal
piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps in pipes, using fittings as required. Vertical
vent pipes may be connected into one (1) main vent riser above vented fixtures. Where circuit vent
or wet vent from any fixture is connected to a vent line serving other fixtures, the connection shall
be at least three feet (3') above the floor on which the fixtures are located to prevent the use of any
vent line as a waste. Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two (2) or more fixtures
shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures' is noted. Branch connections
to exterior downspouts shall terminate three inches (3") above finished grade. The cast-iron
hub -and -spigot or no hub pipe inside of buildings shall be extended six inches (6") above ground
where the lowest floor is self-supporting. This Contractor shall connect waste line from building to
manhole as shown on the drawings.
B. Changes in pipe size on waste, soil, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings of recessed
reducers. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45 degrees wyes, half wyes,
long -sweep bends unless otherwise directed, exceptthat sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks,
and short 1/4 bends of elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in direction of
flow is from the horizontal to the vertical, and on the discharge from water closets.
C. Joints shall be made as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
3.3 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER VALVES AND FITTINGS
A. Valves and fittings for all domestic cold water and hot water services shall be as follows:
1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be Crane No. 930-TRE globe valves. Valves 3" and larger
shall be butterfly valves instead.
2. Globe valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 14-1/2P. Globe valves larger than 3" shall
be butterfly valves instead.
3. Strainers shall be 125 psi, bronze body, screwed ends, of sizes shown on the drawings.
4. Swing check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 137. Swing checks larger than 3"
shall be Crane No. 14493.
5. Lift check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 366E.
6. Butterfly valves shall be Centerline Series LT or Crane #23 designed for 200 psi differential
pressure bubble tight shut off up to 12" size and 150 psi above 12" size. Valves through
6" shall have a locking lever handle and above 6" shall have a gear operator with a memory
stop. Valves shall be furnished with tapped full lug iron bodies, type 316 s.s. discs, type
304 s.s. stems, EPT or EPDM seats and O'rings.
PIPING 15060-3
3.4 PIPE HANGERS AND FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Pipe hangers and fixture supports shall be furnished and set, and the Contractor shall be responsible
for their proper and permanent locations.
B. Horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be supported by approved steel plastic coated hangers spaced
not more than 8' o.c. Horizontal runs of drainage and vent pipes shall be supported by adjustable —
expansionpipe hangers having bolted hinged loops and turnbuckles, or an approved equal. Hangers
on drainage and vent pipe shall be spaced not more than 10' o.c. Hanger and collars shall be of size
proportionate to the weight of the pipe supported.
C. Fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner. Where secured to
concrete or brickwork walls, they shall be fastened with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts shall
be 1/4" brass bolts with 20 threads to the inch and of sufficient length to extend at least 3" into solid —
concrete or brickwork, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves or proper length to bring expansion sleeves
in the solid concrete or brick wall. Where secured to file walls or partitions, they shall be fastened
with 1/4" brass toggle or through bolts. Where through bolts are used, they shall be provided with —
plates or washers at back, set so that heads, nuts, and washers will be concealed by plaster. Bolts
and nuts shall be hexagon, and exposed bolts, nuts, and screw heads shall be provided with -
chromium plated brass washers.
D. Copper pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 260 with plastic coating for non -insulated water
piping and Grinnell No. 300 for insulated water piping. Drainage and vent pipe hangers shall be
similar to Grinnell No. 590. —
E. All hot water supply and returnpiping shall be supported by approved steel hangers, spacednot more
than 8' on centers, equipped with roller pipe supports equal to Fee and Mason, Figure No. 272. —
END OF SECTION
PIPING 15060-4
I
r SECTION 15250
l INSULATION
r
E
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
PM A This contract includes furnishing and installing all insulation specified herein.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION
A. All insulation required under the Plumbing contract and Heating and Air Conditioning Contract shall
^, be equal to and as manufactured by the Knauf Fiber Glass or Johns -Manville, and shall be applied
in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations.
B. Insulation:
l . Cold Water Piping Within Building Lines - Shall be insulated with 1" thick fiber glass pipe
insulation with a factory applied all service jacket with self-sealing lap.
2. Overhead Heating and Air Conditioning Sheet Metal Supply and Return Ducts - Shall be
insulated with 314 lb. density 2" thick fiberglass duct wrap with aluminum foil Kraft vapor
barrier, and shall be secured to ductwork with an approved adhesive and be sealed and
stapled in place.
3. Pipe Fittings - Insulate pipe fittings with Manville Zestons according to manufacturer's
recommendation.
4. Contractor at his option may use interior duct liner in lieu of exterior insulation. Duct liner
shall be 1.5 lb., 1" thick with neoprene spray one side. All transverse joints shall be
protected against air erosion by properly sealing all edges and securing with sheet metal
clips. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips 18" on center.
C. Where insulation is to be applied inside of ducts, exterior insulation will not be required.
_ D. Where insulation occurs inside of ducts, allowance shall be made in sheet metal ductwork to
accommodate a total thickness of two inches.
2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
INSULATION 15250-1
r
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, —
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
2.3 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD
A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke developed
rating no greater than 50. —
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSULATION —
A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. —
END OF SECTION
INSULATION 15250-2 —
r
I SECTION 15400
l PLUMBING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A This contract will include the furnishings and installation of all labor and material necessary to
complete all plumbing and gas fittings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified as follows:
1. Water supply and service.
7 2. System of sanitary drainage, venting and connection to all fixtures as shown on the
} drawings.
3. Gas supply system.
4. Furnishing and installation of all fixtures as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
f A All submittals required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
4
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
A Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
rm responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
2.2 FIXTURES
A Furnish and install all fixtures and products in accordance with fixture schedule as shown on the
drawings and as listed in Fixture Schedule or the approved equal of other manufacturer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the quantity of all fixtures, drains, valves, etc., as shown, as
herein speed or as required to make his installation complete. Lavatory and sink hot and cold
water supplies shall be provided with chromium plated wall stops and chromium plated supplies.
PM Immediately upon award of the contract, this Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval,
a brochure giving a complete description of all fixtures, equipment and fittings which he proposes
` to use. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule at the end of this section. All plumbing fixtures, floor
r drains, etc., shall be equipped with tamperproof screws.
B. Contractor shall install and connect all owner furnished science equipment and furnish all traps and
shutoff valves.
7
PLUMBING
15400-1
2.3 TRAPS
A Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections at the drainage system shall be equipped
with a trap. Traps installed on hub -and -spigot pipe shall be extra -heavy cast-iron. Traps installed
on threaded pipe shall be recess drainage pattern. All basement floor drains shall be equipped with
a deep seal trap. Omit "P" traps at each floor drain in shop areas that feed into sandtrap.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, except that cleanout plugs larger than 4" will not be
required. Cleanouts and access covers at finished walls and exterior walls shall be Wade Co. 8570-R
N.B. cover and at finished floors shall be Wade Co. 8550-5 with Wade No 8300-S #2, N.B. cover,
or the approved equal. Omit access covers for cleanouts in other locations. All wall covers shall
be cadmium plated, and all floor cleanouts shall be polished nickel bronze flush with finish floor.
Cleanouts exterior to the building shall be Wade Co. 7100-X with 9" x 9" access cover set flush with
finish grade in 16" x 16" concrete pad, or as detailed on the drawings.
2.5 ACCESS DOORS
A Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, a Model Z-1376, Zurn stainless steel access door,
size as noted on the drawings, or specified elsewhere. Install gate valves behind doors as shown "
Doors shall be provided with hexed locks, all keyed alike.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Cross Connections and Interconnections: No plumbing fixtures, device or piping shall be installed
which will provide a cross connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking
or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system of a soil or waste into the
water supply system. —
B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the Plumbing System all
fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings having plumbing connections and which are furnished
and installed by others or are specified in other sections of these specifications.
C. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work
and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as
may be required to meet such conditions. Where pipes extend through concrete members, this
Contractor shall core all such members and slabs, unless sleeves have been provided. Chipping
concrete will not be allowed, and if any coring of the concrete members is necessary, this contractor
shall call it to the Architect's attention before doing same.
D. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation Fixtures and equipment shall
be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the
completion of the work the fixtures, materials, and .equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
3.2 STERILIZATION
A The entire cold waterpiping system shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing not less
than fifty (50) parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution and shall
be introduced into the system in a manner approved by the Architect. The sterilizing solution shall
PLUMBING 15400-2
be allowed to remain in the system for a period of 24 hours, during which time all valves and faucets
shall be opened and closed several times. All residual of 4 ppm shall be produced in allparts of the
system at the end of the 24 hour period. After sterilizing, the solution shall be flushed from the
system with clean water until the residual of chlorine content is not greater than .02 ppm unless
otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION
I
PLUMBING 15400-3
i
i
r
i
SECTION 15840
r
DUCTWORK
PART1 GENERAL
7
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishings of all material and
labor as required for the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as
herein specified.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW VELOCITY - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. All ductwork shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the
inside with neatly finished airtight joints. The ducts shall be installed as to be completely free of
vibration. Metal duct slip joints shall be made with an inside radius of not less than the width of
the duct, except that Factory Fabricated Air Turns shall be used where a sharper turn must be made
or where otherwise indicated on the drawings. All takeoffs to registers shall be made with Factory
Fabricated Deflectrols, or approved equal, and all major branches where noted on the plans shall
have splitters with an accessible operating handle and locking device, Young Model No. 917 right
angle gear and No. 1 ceiling regulator, or approved equal.
B. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized iron sheets fabricated and installed in accordance
with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Low Velocity Systems.
C. Air turns shall be as manufacturedby Barber -Colman, or approved equal. No job -built turning vanes
will be used on this job. Where insulation is applied inside of ducts, turning vanes shall be installed
inside of insulation.
D. After all ducts are installed, all dirt and debris shall be removed from inside of ducts.
E. All duct construction seam comers and connections shall be sealed with white "Permagum Slugs"
as manufactured by Virginia Chemicals, Inc.
F. All dimensions indicated shall be inside clear dimensions. Allowance shall be made for internal
insulation as it occurs, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
DUCTWORK 15840-1
i
2.2 ACCESS DOORS
A.
Access doors in ductwork shall be 2" smaller in height than duct dimensions and 12" wide and
located in accessible locations on both sides of all fire and smoke dampers. Doors in vertical —
position shall be equal to Ventlok insulated type, complete with all hinges, hardware and air seal.
Doors in horizontal position shall be job built complete with sash lock, two (2) per side, and rubber
air seal, all as manufactured by Ventlok, or approved equal. _
2.3 FIBER DUCTWORK
A.
Fiber ductwork will not be used on this job anywhere.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.
All duct systems shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall provide a complete and
working system
B.
Hangers for ductwork shall be galvanized steel straps and/or electroplated zinc or hot -dipped
galvanized after threading, threaded rods, minimum of 3/8" diameter.
C.
Hangers shall be spaced a maximum of 8'-0" on center.
D.
When threaded hanger rods are used, bearing plate shall be on channel and/or angle, hot -dipped
galvanized after cutting, and drilling of hanger rod holes.
E.
Hanger rods shall be secured to channels and/or angle by galvanized washer, nut, and locket nut.
Hanger rods shall be suspended from super -structure.
3.2 CLEANING —
A
After installation is complete, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Filters shall be cleaned
and/or replaced with new. Damaged paint shall be sanded and touched -up. All damaged insulation —
shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
DUCTWORK 15840-2
SECTION 16010
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
B. Furnish all labor, materials, service, equipment and appliances required to complete the installation
of the complete electrical system in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings.
C. Electrical Division Index:
16010 - General Electrical Provisions
16110 - Raceways
16120 - Conductors
16130 - Boxes and Fittings
16133 - Cabinets
16140 - Wiring Devices
16500 - Lighting
16770 - Security System
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all electrical and related
work as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified as follows:
1. From starting point connect all panelboards, equipment, appliances, power outlets,
convenience outlets, switches and controls.
2. Conduits, junction boxes, wall outlets for telephone and computer systems.
3. Conduits, wiring.
4. Conduits, pull wires, junction boxes for Owner furnished equipment.
B. Contractor shall review all other disciplines plans and specifications for addition requirements for
temperature controls, motor controls, damper actuators, etc. and shall provide wiring and installation
r as required.
i 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATOR AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
F
A Regulatory Agencies: Installations, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the
applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code
(NESC), and the terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful
jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules,
regulations and authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge to the Owner.
B. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): All materials, appliances, equipment or devices shall conform to
the applicable standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. The label of, or listing by, UL is
required.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-1
C. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and
standards of the following organizations shall apply: American Society of Testing and Materials
(ASTM), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Insulated Power Cable Engineers
Association (IPCEA), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A Material List: As soon as possible after contract award and before material is ordered, the Contractor
shall submit for approval a list of all proposed material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's
name and general description.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval in accordancewith the requirements contained in the SPECIAL
PROVISIONS, a minimum of six (6) copies of all shop drawings after the material list has been "-
approved and prior to ordering. Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical services, control
diagrams, electrical characteristics of special nature or critical to the installation, and pertinent data
required for installation. Indicate in the transmittal that submittal has been reviewed and accepted and all contract deviations identified. In addition to, but not limited to, specific references or
requests, submit shop drawings for the following applicable items: Switchboards, Panelboards,
Lighting Fixtures, Primary Cable, Emergency Battery Units.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on
information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical
requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make all
adjustments to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrentprotection and installation as required to
accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The complete
responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this
specification under which the equipment is furnished.
2.2 MATERIALS
A All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer.
B. Where no specific material, apparatus, or appliance is mentioned, any fast -class product made by
a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets
the approval of the Engineer.
C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design.
D. Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function intended at an altitude of the
project site.
E. Materials and Equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements
speed below. Other materials and equipment shall be as specified elsewhere herein and as shown
on the drawings, and shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture
of such products.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-2
r
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in a first class
workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an
orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall
check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment or material is to be installed, removed or
relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work Commencement of work
signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services, and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom
from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances, and
devices shall be operated under load conditions.
B. After the interior -wiring system installation is complete and at such time as the Engineer may direct,
conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices, and
equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original
characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications.
C. Prior to acceptance or beneficial occupancy, establish nominal building power loads and record
voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these readings make final adjustments of tap changers
on all transformers in the building electrical system to comply with specifications and equipment
installed.
i
D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to prove
acceptability.
E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. The Exchange will furnish the necessary electric
power.
3.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
A. Instructions: Without additional charge to the Owner, furnish competent instruction to the Engineer
in the care, adjustment and operation of all parts of the electrical equipment and systems.
B. Manuals: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver to the Architect two (2) sets of
complete operating and maintenancemanuals for the systems and major equipment installed. Include
catalog data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves and rating data, spare parts lists,
and manufacturer's operating and maintenance data.
C. Other. The above requirements are in addition to specific instructions and manuals speed for
individual systems or equipment.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer, and remote control device to
identify each item with its respective service. Marking may be stencilled on the enclosure or
adjacent surface in utility areas. Provide nameplates in finished area.
i" GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-3
B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8 inch high where specified or noted. In
general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed plastic adhesive tape is
not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device plate.
C. Identify panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, and cabinets by nameplates with
descriptions indicated on the drawings together with indication of location of the feeder overcurrent
protection. Install on inside of hinged doors of panelboards and cabinets.
3.5 WORKMANSHIP
A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical
appearance upon completion. All mechanics shall be capable experienced electricians.
B. Panels and cutout boxes shall be properly supported from the building construction. Boxes shall be
set plumb and at height best suited for adequate operation. Wiring troughs and barriers shall be as
required by the National Electric Code as amended to date.
C. Symbols on drawings are approximately correct, but care shall be taken that all fixture outlets are
symmetrical on spaces, ceiling panels, bays or moms, and all switch outlets are on the strike side
of doors.
D. Outlets may be varied slightly in location either horizontally or vertically by the Owner before
installation. Outlets for special equipment shall be located and verified on the job before final
rough -in is made,
E. Unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed, locate outlet boxes as follows: (Dimensions are
from floor to operating device or bottom of box.)
Switches 40-0"
Convenience Outlets 114" or as noted
Telephone Outlets 11-4" or as noted
Power Outlets 114" or as noted
F. All work shall be concealed, and panels, boxes, etc., shall be flush type, unless otherwise noted on --
the drawings. All conduits and wiring shall be run from overhead unless otherwise noted. If walls
do not extend to ceilings, run conduit in slabs. Conduit in shop areas may be run exposed, threaded
through roof joist. _
G. All flush outlet boxes shall be set so that edge of cover comes flush with finished surface. Outlet
boxes shall be of a suitable size and construction to serve the purpose properly.
H. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are actually required.
I. Outlet boxes shall be provided in all cases with proper supports for fixtures. _
J. All wires shall be polarized. No joints or taps in feeders will be permitted under any condition.
K. Joints in branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide, and shall then consist of one
(1) through circuit, to which shall be spliced the branch from this circuit.
L. Wire and cable connectors shall be solderless, mechanicaltype. Connectors for conductors #8 AWG
and smaller shall be Buchanan Electrical Products copper squeeze -on type with molded rubber or
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-4
r
vinyl cap, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. Scotchlock, or Ideal Industries Super Nut spring
connector with molded vinyl cap.
�.• M. Conduits shall be of such size and shall be so installed that the required conductors may be drawn
in without injury or excessive stain. Powdered soapstone only may be used as a lubricant where
necessary. Sizes of conduits shall be in accordance with National Code tables. Flexible metal
conduit may be used for final connections to motors, etc., but shall not be over 48" in total length
from outlet box to motor. Waterproof flexible conduit may be used in exterior locations.
Connectors for conductors larger than #8 AWG shall be mechanical bolted type, insulated with
clamp -on molded covers or vinyl plastic tape. The manufacturer shall be O.Z. Electrical
Manufacturing Co., or Bumdy Engineering Company. Flexible conduit smaller than 1/2" diameter
shall not be permitted to be used.
�.. N. Where conduits enter boxes they shall be secured in place by galvanized lockouts and bushings.
Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction.
O. Conduits, except those which are vertical for their entire length, and except conduits connecting
rceiling outlets together, shall have a drag consisting of a number of tight fitting rubber washers
! drawn through before wires are pulled in
END OF SECTION
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-5
r�
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
PART1
GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
P„ A
General Provision of the Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division
1 General Requirements apply.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
r
A
General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
r- PART 2
I
PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
A
Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated
or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel zinc -coated on the outside and
either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside.
�., C.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or
coated with an approved corrosion- resistant coating on the inside.
D.
Flexible Conduit: Commercial Greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate grounding bond wire
installed in the conduit in addition to other wires. No flexible conduit shall be installed over 2' in
t
length
r E.
Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanizedsteeltubing with extruded liquid -tight PVC outer
jacket and a continuous copperbonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. Where
a separate grounding conductor is installed in the conduit, bonding conductor in the conductor in the
convolutions may be omitted.
F.
Conduit Size: Nfinimum conduit size 1/2 inch except where specifically approved for equipment
connections. Sizes shall be as noted on the drawings and where not noted sizes shall be as required
4
by the NEC,
2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC, and EMT Fittings: Iron or steel only. Cast fittings will not be allowed.
B.
Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either steel or malleable iron only, with
insulated throats, and shall be of one of the following types:
1. Wedge and screw type with angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the conduit.
r"'
2. Squeezeor clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and
clamped by one or more screws.
RACEWAYS 16110-1
r..
3. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit convolutions.
C. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic
compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Gland shall be either steel or malleable iron only with
insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without "0" ring seal. Each
connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the
outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected.
D. Connectors and Couplings: Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel conduit or IMC
permitted. Set screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not permitted. Steel set screw
connectors and couplings permitted for special conditions when approved. EMT couplings and
connectors either steel or malleable iron only, "Concrete -tight" or "Rain -tight", and either the gland
and ring compression type or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. Connectors to have
insulated throats. EMT fittings using set screws or indentations of a means of attachment not
permitted.
E. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity,of
the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC, and rigid aluminum conduit larger than
1/2 inch size.
F. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction on —
opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be
subject to excessive stresses shallbe provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings shallbe
hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring.
G. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits
and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water
vapor shall be of the continuous drain type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A- Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, or EMT unless otherwise specified. Aluminum conduit
is not permitted.
B. EMT: Not permitted underground nor embedded in concrete.
C. Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit for lights, motor or equipment connections and then only
to the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Install flexible conduit connections at
all resilient -mounted equipment. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp --
locations and for connections to wet -pipe mechanical systems.
D. Conduit in Concrete: Rigid steel conduit, or rigid non-metallic conduit maybe embedded in concrete _
providing the outside diameter does not exceed one-third the thickness of the concrete
slab, wall, or beam, is located entirely within the center third of the member, and lateral spacing of
conduits is not less than three diameters.
E. Steel Conduit in Ground: Rigid steel conduit, that is not completely encased in concrete but is in
contact with ground or on a vapor barrier, shall be wrapped in Scotchap 51 half -lapped, or shall have
an additional outside factory coating of polyvinyl chloride with a minimum coat thickness of 20 mils.
RACEWAYS 16110-2
7
Other PVC of Phenolic resin -epoxy coating material which is equally flexible and chemically
resistant may be used providing approval by the Engineer is obtained prior to installation.
F. Exposed Conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at right angles to the lines of the
building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard elbows, screw jointed
conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of standard elbows.
G. Concealed Conduits: Install conduit systems concealed where possible unless otherwise noted.
Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and where specifically
h approved by the Engineer. Install concealed conduit systems in as direct lines as possible.
H. Exterior Underground Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, wrapped as above, shall be used for
all circuits outside the building slab. Conduit shall be buried a minimum of 2'-6" below finished
grade. Concrete encased PVC conduit may be used for all conductors except the service entrance
secondary.
I. Conduit Bends: In any conduit or EMT run the number of quarter bends or equivalent between
terminations at cabinets or boxes shall not exceed four (4) bends for conduits up to 1-1/4 inch, three
(3) bends for 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch conduits, and two (2) bends for 3- to 4-inch conduits. Conduits
r- run between cabinets or boxes shall not exceed 100 feet for straight runs nor 100 feet for runs with
r.
maximum number of bends. Bends in telephone feeder conduits shall be long -radius.
J. Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT terminating in the bottoms of boxes
p or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to installation of conductors.
K. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits pass from warm to cold
locations, and where otherwise indicated.
L. Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit sleeves not
used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing through walls. Sleeves
that are used shall be caulked tight with lead yarn.
3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT as required by the National
Electrical Code, including runs above suspended ceilings. In suspended ceiling construction, only
lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. No supports shall
be permitted from metal roof decks.
B. Straps: Install one hole pipe straps on conduits 1-1/2 inch or smaller. Install individual pipe hangers
for conduits larger than 1-1/2 inch. Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods may be used in dry
locations in lieu of pipe straps.
C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers where two or more horizontal conduits or EMT
run parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger member
by a U- bolt, one -hole strap or other specially designed and approved fastener.
D. Hanger Rods: Install 3/16 inch diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel fasteners, clips
and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for the support of any conduit, EMT or
light fixtures in open ceiling areas.
RACEWAYS 16110-3
E. Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts,
to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hoIIow masonry by means of toggle bolts.
Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Power -driven fasteners may be used to attach pipe
straps and hanger rods to concrete where approved by the Engineer.
F. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly secured by means of pipe clamps, hangers,
etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO Products, Inc. Wire wrapped around conduits and
supporting members will not be acceptable.
3.3 11DENTUICATION
A. Contractor shall furnish as built drawings showing routing and/or terminations of all conduit and
boxes run into floor and from underfloor into wall or above ceiling terminations.
3.4 CLOSING OF OPENINGS
A. Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage of conduits
or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts, such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such
openings, shall be filled or closed in a manner approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAYS 16110-4
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS)
A. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Copper conductors with
600 volt insulation. Stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors shall
not be permitted.
r B. Insulation: Type THHN insulation minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings.
Type THW minimum or Type XHHW filled cross -linked polyethylene 90 deg. C thermosetting
insulation for conductors No. 8 or larger. 90 deg. C minimum insulation within fixture wireways
of fluorescent fixtures, Type RF-2 or TF commercial fixture wire, No. 16 AWG may be used for
Class 2 remote control and signal circuits.
C. Size: No. 12 AWG minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Not less than
NEC requirements for the system to be installed. Conductors for trench circuits of 120 volts, or
more than 100 feet long from panel to load center, shall be No. 10 AWG. Class 1 remote control
�.. and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control
Cand signal circuit conductors shall be not less than No. 16 AWG. If Contractor furnishes other than
specified equipment, it shall be his responsibility to furnish proper size conduit and conductors as
required without additional cost to the Owner.
D. Conductors shall be color coded as follows:
r'+ 120/208V
Phase A Black
Phase B Red
Phase C Blue
Neutral White
Ground Green
r
Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductor. Conductors No. 12 and 10
shall be solid color compound for the entire length. Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 maybe color
coded at each termination and in each box or enclosure with 6 inches of half -lapped 314 inch
pressure -sensitive, plastic tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound.
CONDUCTORS
16120-1
2.2 COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC CABLE
A Foil shielded twisted pair cable shall be stranded equal to Belden "Belfoil", sized as required.
B. Unless otherwise noted, co -axial cable shall be Belden RG-59, 20 AWG.
C. As required or specified in the section of these specifications specifying the equipment. Cable shall —
be continuous from backboards or panels to outlets or other termination points without splices.
2.3 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS
A Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual conductor and tightens due to weight of the
cable shall be used for cables without metallic sheath. Basket weave type supports shall be used for
cables with metallic sheath. —
2.4 CONNECTORS AND LUGS
A. For Copper Conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch-Lok or T&B Sta-Kon compression or indent
type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps.
B. For Copper Conductors Larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hex screw, or bolt -type pressure
connectors, properly taped or insulated.
2.5 TAPE
A Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum insulation resistance,
oil -resistant vinyl backing, oil -resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of supporting combustion per
ASTM D-568 Test Method B.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 , WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS)
A Measure the insulating resistance of service entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors, and
service ground. Measurements shall be taken between conductors and between conductors and
ground. Resistance shall be 1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without
branch circuit loads. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Engineer, and shall be in
accordance with the applicable IPCEA Standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish
all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in presence of the
Engineer. Submit written reports of the tests and results shall be furnished to the Engineer.
3.2 SPLICES (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures. Conductor lengths shall be continuous from
termination to termination without splices unless approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
CONDUCTORS 16120-2
d
PART1 GENERAL
: aLilil�al�tel`111�'1
SECTION 16130
BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
e .
A- General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Construction: Zinc -coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes of a class to satisfy the condition at
each outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required. Knockout type with knockouts
removed only where necessaryto accommodatethe conduit entering. Square cornered, straight sided
gang boxes, 4 inch octagon concrete rings and 4 inch octagon hung ceiling boxes with bars may be
folded type; one-piece deep -drawn type for all other boxes.
�^ B. Size: To accommodate the required number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices in accordance
with NEC requirements, but not smaller than size shown or specified. Standard concrete type boxes
not to exceed 6 inches deep except where necessary to permit entrance of conduits into sides of
boxes without interference with reinforcing bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the device
or application intended.
! C. Fixture Studs: 3/8 inch malleable -iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting fixtures and
interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop cards.
D. Exposed: Screw joint type, with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to the weather.
E. Tile Boxes: Rectangularin shape with square comers and straight sides for receptacles and switches
mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick stone or wood walls.
Install without plaster rings.
F. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or specified, not less
than 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep for signal devices, 4-11/16 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep
for two devices and multigang boxes for more than two devices. Boxes for switches and receptacles
on unfinished walls may be screw joint type with covers to fit the devices.
G. Wall -Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, unless
otherwise noted on the drawings.
H. Light Fixture Boxes: 4 inch diameterby 1-1/2 inch deep minimum for ceiling and interior bracket
fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have 3 inch diameter
BOXES AND FITTINGS 16130-1
openings. Screw joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with exposed
conduits.
I. Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green equipment
ground conductor, for serving motors, lighting fixtures, or receptacles. Grounding terminal shall be
green -colored washer -in -hand machine screw or grounding bushing.
2.2 PULL BOXES
A. Minimum NEC requirements unless largerbox is noted. Pull boxes with internal volume not more
than 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for outlet boxes with blank covers. Pull boxes with
internal volume over 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for cabinets except covers shall be same
thickness as box and shall have corrosion -resistant screws or bolt attachments.
2.3 FLOOR BOXES
A. Heavy-duty, cast, adjustable type suitable for the device or application indicated, unless noted. --
Provide carpet flanges in carpeted area. Each telephone outlet shall consist of a horizontal cast
aluminum housing with a one inch bushed side opening. Outlets shall have provisions to
accommodate a ten wire telephone terminal block. Gaskets shall be used to insure proper
installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, outlet boxes shall be flush _
mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with the finished wall or
ceiling line, or, if installed in walls and ceilings of incombustible construction, not more than 1/4
inch back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of devices vertical, unless otherwise specified.
Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with plaster covers. A multiple of box
extensions and/or covers will not be permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with
suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood,
expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work.
B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall -mounted outlet box shall be construed to mean
the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile,
block, or brick construction mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint in the mounting height
indicated. Verify with Architect.
C. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount so the
centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. Install outlet boxes near doors
or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on
architectural drawings, unless other locations are approved by the Architect.
3.2 PULL BOXES
A. Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for maximum lengths of
conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under Conduit and Fittings.
BOXES AND FITTINGS 16130-2
3.3 FLOOR BOXES
A Install level with top covers adjusted flush with finished floor or floor tile.
3.4 F[X TURE CONNECTIONS
A. Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay -in or accessible ceilings shall be connected with minimum
112 inch flexible metallic conduit, 4 to 6 feet long, with grounding provided. Flexible conduit shall
not be used as the ground.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A Identify all exposed junction and pull boxes according to the system and voltage carried by means
of painted -on stencils or labels, with legible letters and contrasting colors and without abbreviations.
In general, use yellow color. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 9 - Finishes.
END OF SECTION
BOXES AND FITTINGS
16130-3
SECTION 16133
CABINETS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
s A. Sheet steel except those exposed to wet or rain conditions which shall be raintight unless otherwise
L noted. Cabinets without through feeder wiring shall be arranged to provide a wiring gutter not less
than 4 inches wide for branch circuit panelboards served by feeders up to 4/0. Panelboards served
by feeders in excess of 4/0 up to and including 750 MCM, shall be provided with top, bottom and
side gutters 8 inches wide. Cabinets shall be of standard make and shall be equal in all respects to
those bearing the Underwriters' Laboratories label. Cabinets, including boxes, shall be made of
galvanized steel. All outside surfaces of trim and doors shall be given a factory finish coat of No.
61 ANSI gray paint, or approved manufacturer's standard. Cabinets for communications systems
¢ shall have 5/8 inch exterior grade, one -face B-grade or equal plywood backboard inside with
maximum height and width
2.2 FRONTS
A One-piece sheet steel frame and a hinged door with catch and lock for flush cabinets. Telephone
and signal cabinets for surface mounting shall be equipped with a door hinged directly to cabinet.
One-piece sheet steel 3/4 inch flange around all edges shaped to cover edge of box. Fronts may be
secured to box by means of flathead screws with captive nuts or clamps.
2.3 DOORS
A. Doors shall close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame, with a close fitting
joint between door and frame. The doors shall be fitted with substantial flush hinges placed not over
24 inches apart, nor more than 6 inches from ends of doors, fastened permanently to the door and
frame with round -headed rivets or spot welds, or with concealed flush piano hinges. Fastening
r screws of fronts shall be set not over 24 inches apart. Doors over 48 inches in height shall be
equipped with a vault handle and a three-point catch
2.4 LOCKS
A. Furnish each cabinet with a combination catch and flat key lock. The telephone, electrical and signal
cabinet locks shall be fitted to separate keying for each system. Furnish two keys for each cabinet.
CABINETS 16133-1
2.5 GROUND BAR
A. Each cabinet for a panelboard shall be provided with a copper interior ground bar suitably braced
or bolted to the cabinet wall. The equipment ground bar shall be equivalent in current carrying
capacity to the incoming feeder ground conductor and shall have approved pressure connector
terminations for the associated feeders, branch circuits, etc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CABINETS
A. Cables installed in the wiring gutters of cabinets shall be neatly bundled, routed, and supported.
Minimum bending radii as recommended by the cable manufacturer shall not be reduced. Lighting
and power cabinets shall be installed with tops 6 feet 6 inches above floor and bottoms not less than.
12 inches above floor.
END OF SECTION
CABINETS 16133-2
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
1.2
PART 2
2.1
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES .
A Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
PRODUCTS
SNAP SWITCHES
A Unless otherwise speed, each snap switch (flush tumbler -toggle) shall be of the A.C. general use
type for mounting in a single -gang spacing, fully rated 20 amperes minimum on inductive and
resistive loads at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the
Underwriters' - Laboratories, Inc., UL 20 Fifth Edition Standard snap Switches and further
requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single -pole, 3-way or 4-way, of the
maintained, momentary, or lock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any
position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of molded phenolic, urea or melamine
with cover of molded phenolic, urea or melamine. Fibre, paper or similar insulating material shall
not be used for body or cover: Ivory color handles unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Silver or silver alloy contacts. A.C. 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of
withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA Publication WD1-1965, and shall be as follows unless
otherwise noted:
�,. 20A 120/277 AC
Levi on
1P
1221-I
2P
1222-I
3-way
1223-I
r 4-way
1224-I
3-position 2 cct maintained
1385-I
3-position 2 cct momentary
1557-I
:- Lighted handle pilot light
1221-PL
Dimmers
61000-W
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in
accordance with NEMA Publication WD1-1965, Part 3 and Part 10, and the Texas Department of
Human Services Minimum Standards for Day Care Centers, Section 4300, Number 1, Part A
Fire-resistant, non -absorptive, hot -welded, phenolic composition or equalbodies and bases with metal
plaster ears (integral with the supporting member). Single or duplex as shown or noted on drawings.
Ivory color unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong.
WIRING DEVICES 16140-1
B. Grounding Type: All receptacle shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment
ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated grounding jumper (based on Table
250-95 of the NEC with minimum size No. 14 AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall
be internally connected to the receptacle mounting yoke.
C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be as follows:
20A - 125V AC 2P 3W Leviton 5362-SC-I
D. Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of duplex receptacle as specified above, mounted in a box
with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap
shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a short length of bead chain or shall be of the
spring hinged flap type.
E. Isolated grounding receptacles shall be the same NEMA configuration as 20A 125 volt receptacle
except that the grounding pole shall be isolated from the mounting strap and be colored orange
similar to Hubbell #1G5251 or 1G4262. Ground these devices by means of a separate green
equipment grounding conductor. _
F. Special: Receptaclesfor special applications shall be as indicated on the drawings. This Contractor
shall verify exact requirements and furnish a matching receptacle where indicated.
G. All 220V receptacles in areas within children's reach shall have safety covers.
2.3 PLUG CAPS
A. Except for duplex receptacles, one matching plug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No plug
caps are required for duplex receptacles. Provide watertight, male plug caps in damp locations or
where exposed to weather.
2.4 DEVICE PLATES
A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet, and special
purpose outlet. Provide multi -gang outlet plates for multi -gang boxes. Plates on finished walls shall
be of stainless steel. Screws shall be metal with counter- sunk heads, in a color to match the finish
of the plate.
B. Exposed: Plates for exposed screw jointed fittings shall match the fittings with edges of plates flush
with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium plated steel with gasket. Plates for cast type boxes at
locations subject to wet or rain conditions shall be of the cast, vapor -tight type. Provide hinged lift
covers for devices.
C. Communication: Plates for telephone and intercommunication have a 1/2 inch bushed opening in
the center.
D. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DEVICE PLATES
A. Install with alignment tolerance of III6th inch and all edges in continuous contact with wall surfaces.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES 16140-2
I
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART GENERAL
1 1.1 REQUIREMENTS
l A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
r 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special installation instructions,
photometric data, and descriptive literature. When fixtures are proposed for substitution and prior
approval has not been issued, the submittal for approval shall include catalog cuts of both the
specified and proposed fixtures. Catalog numbers shown on the Fixture Schedule are indicative of
the general type desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any manufacturer.
r.. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics and of
equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved by the Engineer. All fluorescent fixtures shall
be of the type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
t
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish all lighting fixtures throughout of the type indicated on the drawings, complete with lamps,
sockets, wiring, fitters, hangers, plaster rings, etc., as required.
r 2.2 LAMPS
A. Fluorescent: 32W F32/T8/SP35/WM unless noted otherwise.
B. Incandescent: Inside frosted; extended service, 130 volt.
C. H.I.D.: Clear unless noted, Type 'T 'self -extinguishing. Universal burning lamps will not be
accepted.
D. Manufacturers: General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania.
2.3 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent: UL approved, high power factor with ETL certified CBM label, suitable for 120V
operation as required. Sound rating of "A" for interior installations. Provide premium Class P
protected ballasts with built-in thermally actuated automatic reclosing device. Manufacturers shall
certify in writing that the ballast hot spot shall not exceed 90 deg. F. ambient temperature. Ballasts
shall be energy savings type. Provide two (2) bolt attachment of ballasts.
LIGHTING 16500-1
i
C`
F
e
B. H.I.D.: One lamp type as required for the application. Suitable for use with H.I.D. lamps. Ballast
for exterior H.I.D. lamps shall be rated for -20 deg. F.
C. Manufacturers: Advance Mark III, General Electric MaxiMiser I.
2.4 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. All fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all
sections of the channel structure shall be securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted
in such a way that ballast hum will be amplified or transmitted into work areas.
B. Fluorescent fixtures indicated to have dual switching shall have the inboard lamps connected to one
ballast and the outboard lamps connected to the other ballast.
2.5 FINISH
A. Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to applying finish Metal parts shall be
aluminum, brass, copper, bronze, or steel, with powder coat, post -fabrication baked white enamel
finish unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS
A. Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place, electrically and mechanically, permitting easy
insertion or removal of lamps. Provide corrosion resistant treated lamp pin contacts.
2.7 CEILING TRIM
A. Furnish proper ceiling frames for ceiling material in which recessed fixtures are to be installed.
Verify prior to ordering.
2.8 LENS
A. When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified, it shall be of 100% acrylic meeting American Society
for Testing Materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM
D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous sides panels and other luminous plastic members of
fixtures shall be made of not less than 0.156 inch thick prismatic Pattern 19 clear acrylic material.
Plastic shall be non-flammable or shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per _
minute for a 1/2 inch width of the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the
naked eye either when subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM
D-795-44T (500 hours exposure, using type S-1 lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent
lamp source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be used. The plastic shall be non -electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an anti -static wax.
2.9 HOUSING
A. Not less than 20 gauge steel with baked white enamel finish applied over corrosion -resistant primer
unless otherwise specifically approved.
LIGHTING 16500-2
I rM
PART 3 EXECUTION
i
3.1 SUPPORTS
A. Support ceiling fixtures by anchorage to the ceiling only where the ceiling is concrete or masonry
units. Provide mounting angles on trapeze where required to support light fixtures between structural
members. No lighting fixtures, conduit or Qutlet boxes shall be supported from the building sheet
metal deck Where lay -in construction is used, fixtures shall be on the lay -in type. Coordinate
supports for lay -in fixtures with Ceiling Contractor.
3.2 LOW DENSITY CEILING
A. Special attention is directed to the code restriction against mounting fluorescent fixtures on
combustible low -density cellulose fiberboard (NEC 410 76(6)). If fixtures are to be installed that
are not UL approved for this condition, a suitable mounting arrangement shall be developed which
meets the approval of the Engineer.
3.3 CEILING TRIM AND MEANS OF SUPPORT
A. The ceiling trim and means of support of recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with the type of
ceiling to be installed to insure proper installation.
3.4 BLOCKING
A. Protect housings of recessed lighting fixtures during installation of internal blocking or framing to
prevent distortion of sides or dislocation of threaded lugs which upon completion must be in perfect
alignment and match the corresponding holes in frames or rims so that holding screws can be
installed freely without forcing and remain so they can be easily removed when servicing. Threads
to receive holding screws shall be chased after plating and finishing to insure easy installation and
removal of knurled beaded screws by thumb pressure.
3.5 LAMP GUARDS
A. Provide safety guard clips on open type fluorescent fixtures to prevent lamps from falling.
3.6 CLEAN-UP
A. At final inspection, the fixtures and lighting equipment shall be in first class operating order, in
perfect condition as to finish, free from defects, completely lamped, clean and free from dust, plaster
or paint spots, and complete with the required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or other
components necessary to complete the fixtures.
3.7 LAMPS
A. Install new lamps in all lighting fixtures seven (7) days before building acceptance or beneficial
occupancy, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
LIGHTING 16500-3
SECTION 16770
SECURITY SYSTEM
PART1
GENERAL
p
i
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General
Requirements.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A.
General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010
B.
Raceways - Section 16110
C.
Conductors - Section 16120
r
D.
Boxes and Fittings - Section 16130
E.
Cabinets - Section 16133
1.3 SECURITY SYSTEM, GENERALLY
A
This section covers the installation of a security system to be installed in the existing facility. The
system shall be installed as indicated on the plans and specified herein.
B.
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install as specified hereinafterand as shown on the plans,
t
the security monitoring devices including conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, etc. in operating order.
C.
The contract drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the system. All equipment
7
shall be completely installed properly, interconnected, and placed in proper working order.
s
`
D.
All equipment shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories and be listed by their re-
examination service. All work must be done in accordance with applicable electrical codes, under
the direction of a qualified and approved factory distributor, to the approval of Owner. He shall also
train the Owner's personnel in the operation of the equipment.
E.
Qualification of Installer and Installation: The system shall be installed only by experienced firms
regularly engaged in the installation of type system subcontracting. The Contractor shall install the
equipment at the locations indicated, install all wiring necessary to interconnect the equipment, and
connect all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommended instructions furnished
therewith All wiring shall be in conduit, unless otherwise noted.
F.
The security system shall include the installation of all card reader systems, door alarms and motion
j'
detectors where shown on the drawings. The system shall include all relays, wiring, hardware, etc.
for a complete and operable system.
G.
Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. The installation shall be
r'
SECURITY SYSTEM 16770-1
accomplished by workmen skilled in this type of work. System connections shall be made by
approved plug connections, identified screw terminal strips, and non -corrosive resin core solder on
terminal strips or connectors. Wiring shall be neatly cabled, trained, fanned in each cabinet and
junction box, with each cable permanently tagged to identify the area of function served. Runs of
conduit, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, and properly supported, and shall be
parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions.
H. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, fuses and pilot lights, to be free of defects in material
and workmanship under normal use for a period of 360 days from date of acceptance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special installation instructions and
descriptive literature.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR
A. Security System:
1. Door card readers with door hardware.
2. Motion detectors.
3. Glass break alarms.
4. Alarm annunciators with interconnects.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTS
A. After complete installation of the equipment, and at the time directed, the Contractor shall conduct
tests to demonstrate that operating and installation requirements of this specification have been met.
3.2 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall inspect the equipment furnished by the supplier and shall notify the Architect
after receipt of equipment of damaged, defective or insufficient parts. Failure to report such
discrepancies will signify Contractor's acceptance of equipment as complete and functionally
operative.
END OF SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM 16770-2